JP2006026321A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Game machine

  The present invention relates to gaming machines represented by pachinko machines and slot machines.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the game is stimulated by displaying various images on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device as part of the production. And the pachinko machine which arouses a bigger interest with respect to a player by the production | presentation displayed on a display apparatus is supported by more players. Therefore, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device are complicated, or the liquid crystal screen is enlarged to improve the power of the display image. The interest is improved.

  However, since there is a limit to the production of games by displaying images on a display device, in recent years, a pachinko machine equipped with an accessory that makes a predetermined movement (movable accessory) has appeared, and this movable accessory and display device Further enhancement of interest is achieved by constructing an effect linked to the image display by.

When a movable accessory is mounted on a pachinko machine, a solenoid is often employed as a drive source for reasons such as high responsiveness and ease of control. Further, not only the above-mentioned improvement of the entertainment by the effects as described above, but also the improvement of the entertainment in the playability can be considered by increasing the number of winning awards such as electric tulips expanded by the solenoid. Therefore, the number of solenoids provided in the pachinko machine will continue to increase.
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 15-38779

  However, the solenoid is classified as a component that consumes a large amount of electric current among the electric components used in the pachinko machine. Therefore, the number of solenoids mounted on the game board of the pachinko machine greatly affects the amount of current consumption of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, the power supply board that supplies current to the pachinko machine is designed independently of the design of the game part, and the number of solenoids increases due to the replacement of the game board. If the amount exceeds the power supply capacity of the power supply board, a design change is required, and there is a problem that the design cost is increased and the time required for the design is consumed greatly. Alternatively, the power supply capacity of the power supply board can be designed in advance in consideration of an increase in the amount of current consumption due to an increase in the number of solenoids. However, in this case, there is a problem that the cost of the power supply board increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and even if the number of solenoids provided in the gaming machine increases, the increase does not easily affect the maximum current consumption amount of the power supply capacity. It aims to provide a controlled gaming machine.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a plurality of movable members movable between a first position and a second position, and each position of the movable members are designated as a gaming state or effect. Depending on the state, the position designation means for designating either the first position or the second position, and when the position of the movable member is designated as the first position by the position designation means, a current is applied. When the position of the movable member is designated as the second position by the position designation means, the current is deenergized when the movable member is located at the first position. Designated position confirmation means for confirming the position of the movable member designated by the position designation means, comprising a plurality of drive means provided for each movable member for positioning the movable member at the second position And the driving hand Detecting means for detecting whether the total amount of current consumption energized to the current exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from the state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current To the drive means for controlling the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the position designation means designates the first position. When the total current consumption amount due to the energization of the power source is detected when the detection means exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source from the state less than or less than the amount permitted by the capacity of the power source. , The position designation means before the detection by the detection means so that the total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. Drive information initial value setting means for setting energization cutoff instruction information for instructing not to energize current as an initial value of drive information for the drive means designated at one position, and its drive information initial value setting means After the initial value of the drive information is set by, the total in the drive means corresponding to the movable member confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the position designation means has designated the first position. The drive whose total current consumption is to be controlled so that the total current consumption due to the energization of the drive means whose current consumption is to be controlled is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current. Drive information setting means for setting the energization instruction information for instructing each of the means to energize or the energization cut-off instruction information as drive information at predetermined time intervals. When drive information is set for each of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled by the drive information setting means or the drive information initial value setting means, the drive information is set to the drive means. Output means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a plurality of movable members that move between the first position and the second position and a plurality of drive members that drive each of the movable members are provided. Each movable member is energized to the first position or the corresponding drive member by applying a current to the corresponding drive member according to the position designated by the position designation means according to the gaming state or the production state. It is in a non-energized state and is located at the second position. Specifically, if the position specified by the position specifying means is the first position, the drive member is energized and the movable member is positioned at the first position, or the position specified by the position specifying means. Is in the second position, the drive member is deenergized and the movable member is in the second position.

  A current is passed through each of the drive members whose total current consumption is to be controlled among the drive members corresponding to the movable members that have been confirmed by the designated position confirmation unit as the designated position by the position designation unit. The energization instruction information for instructing or the energization cut-off stage information for instructing not to energize the current is set as drive information by the drive information setting means at predetermined time intervals. Here, in this drive information setting means, the total current consumption amount due to energization to the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current. The drive information (energization instruction information or energization cutoff instruction information) is set for each of the drive means that should control the total current consumption.

  The initial value of the drive information by the drive information setting means is set by the drive information initial value setting means. Specifically, by the energization of the drive member whose total current consumption is controlled among the drive members corresponding to the movable member, the designated position confirmation unit confirming that the designated position by the position designation unit is the first position. When the total current consumption is detected by the detection means to be greater than or greater than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from a state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current, The drive that has been designated as the first position by the position designation means before the detection so that the total current consumption amount is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply by the drive information initial value setting means. For the means, the energization cutoff instruction information is set as the initial value of the drive information.

  When the drive information (energization instruction information or energization cutoff instruction information) is set for each of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled by the drive information setting means or the drive information initial value setting means, an output The drive information is output to the drive means by the means.

  As a result, the total current consumption due to energization of the drive means that controls the total current consumption among the drive means corresponding to the movable member designated as the first position by the position designation means is the capacity of the power supply. When the value exceeds (or exceeds) the amount allowed by the control unit, energization control is started for the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled, and thereafter, the sum of energization to the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled The amount of current consumption is limited to less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply supplying the current.

  In this case, for example, the number of drive units for which the energization instruction information is set by the drive information setting unit, the total amount of current consumed by energizing the drive unit according to the energization instruction information is determined by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current. By making the number less than or less than the permissible amount, the total current consumption due to energization of the driving means whose total current consumption should be controlled is less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current. Or it can be made less. Further, intermittent energization in which a predetermined energization period and a predetermined energization interruption period are repeated for each driving unit is sufficient for the corresponding movable member to be positioned (maintained) at the first position. By assigning drive information (energization instruction information or energization cut-off instruction information) by the drive information allocating means at predetermined time intervals so as to indicate the energization rate, the driving of the movable member and the control of the total current consumption amount can be realized simultaneously. can do.

Note that “before detection by the detection means” does not include the time of detection by the detection means. In addition, the “non-energized state” for positioning the movable member at the second position includes the energization interruption period when the drive unit is energized intermittently by alternately repeating the energization period and the energization interruption period. I can't. On the other hand, in order to position the movable member at the first position, “the current is supplied to the corresponding driving means”, the case where the driving means is supplied continuously or intermittently. Is also included.
According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the drive information setting means, which is performed every predetermined time, specifies the position of the movable member as the first position by the position specifying means. For each of the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled, an intermittent current in which an energization period for energizing current and an energization interruption period for interrupting current energization are periodically repeated is [(the total consumption Energization at an energization rate of 100% of the number of driving means whose current amount is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source) / (total number of the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled) The drive information is assigned so as to make it happen.
The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the drive means corresponding to the movable member whose position designation by the position designation means is the first position is energized. An energization start timing storage means for storing the start timing, wherein the drive information initial value setting means confirms by the detection means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position by the designated position confirmation means; From the state in which the total current consumption due to energization of the drive means that should control the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. In the case where it is detected that the power supply capacity exceeds or exceeds the allowable amount, the energization start timing storage means detects the detection by the detection means. To the driving means for the earlier timing it is stored, and sets the energization cutoff instruction information as the driving information.
The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the main control means for performing main control relating to the game, and instructions output from the main control means by one-way communication. Peripheral control means for performing peripheral control related to a game based on the driving control information transmitting means for transmitting information related to the driving status of the driving means controlled by the main control means to the peripheral control means The drive information initial value setting means includes the drive means corresponding to the movable member that has been confirmed by the detection means to be designated by the designated position confirmation means as the first position. The total current consumption due to energization of the drive means that should control the total current consumption is less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply by the detection means. Is detected in the driving means controlled by the peripheral control means before the detection by the detection means when it is detected that the amount is less than or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply. The energization time storage means stores that the drive is controlled by the peripheral control means whose timing is stored by the energization start timing storage means, or that the current is supplied before detection by the detection means. The energization cutoff instruction information is set as the drive information for the drive means.
The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the total number of drive means to control the total current consumption amount is n times (n is an integer of 1 or more). A counter for counting the counter, a counter updating unit for updating the value of the counter every time corresponding to a time interval at which the output by the output unit is performed, and [(the total current consumption amount) for each value of the counter The total number of the drive means to control)-(the number of the drive means in which the total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source)] Assignment information storage means for storing assignment information to which the energization cutoff instruction information is assigned, and the drive information initial value setting means is configured such that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position by the designated position confirmation means. Ah The total consumption current amount due to energization of the drive means that should control the total consumption current amount in the drive means corresponding to the movable member confirmed as above is allowed by the detection means according to the capacity of the power source. From the detection by the detection means in the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means when it is detected that the quantity allowed to exceed or exceed the quantity allowed by the capacity of the power supply from the state below or below the quantity For the drive means in which the previous timing is stored by the energization start timing storage means, or for the drive means in which the energization time storage means stores that power is supplied from before the detection by the detection means , The value assigned to the energization cutoff instruction information in the assignment information stored by the assignment information storage means And a counter initial value setting means for setting the initial value.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the total consumption current amount of the current supplied to the driving means for positioning the movable member at the first position is less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source that supplies the current. Limited to less than. Accordingly, since the drive means is energized within the range of the total current consumption according to the capacity of the power supply device that supplies current to the entire gaming machine, even if the number of drive means is increased, There is no need to change the design of the board. Therefore, since the power supply substrate can be made common without depending on the number of driving means, there is an effect that the design cost, the work time and the labor required for the design can be reduced. In addition, there is no need to increase the power supply capacity with a margin in advance, and it is possible to reduce the cost of the power supply board and to suppress the waste of electric power depending on the number of driving means.

Further, when controlling the total consumption current amount to be less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, from the state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, depending on the capacity of the power source. When it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the allowable amount, the drive means that has been energized before the detection is performed is cut off. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of drive units that require energization increases due to the designation of the first position, the total current consumption amount of the current that is energized to the drive unit that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, there is an effect that the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.
According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is obtained. Even if it is necessary to energize the drive means to position the movable member in the first position (maintain it in the first position), the energization rate is [(total current consumption is allowed by the capacity of the power source. The number of drive means that are less than or less than the amount) / (total number of drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled)] × 100% by performing intermittent energization to drive the movable member and the total current consumption There is an effect that it is possible to simultaneously realize the control.
According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. The total amount of current consumed by energizing the corresponding driving means to position the movable member in the first position (maintain it in the first position) is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. The drive corresponding to the movable member designated as the first position, which is stored by the energization start timing storage means when it is detected from the state that the amount exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source The energization is interrupted for the drive means that has started energization at the timing when the energization is started before the detection. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, there is an effect that the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.
Note that the “timing at which energization is started to the drive unit” stored in the energization start timing storage unit is designated from the second position to the first position by designating the first position by the position designating unit. Only the timing at which energization of the drive means is started for the movement, or the designation of the first position by the position designation means is continuing, and the energization period and the energization cut-off period for maintaining the movable member at the first position. When intermittent energization is repeated, the start timing may be updated each time the energization period is started.
According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is produced. Generally, a gaming machine includes main control means for performing main control relating to a game and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to a game based on an instruction output from the main control means. Thus, the entire gaming machine is controlled. In this case, the main control means performs one-way communication with the peripheral control means. That is, the main control means cannot receive instructions from the peripheral control means. Therefore, the main control means cannot know the information of the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means. For this reason, since the number of drive units that require energization increases due to the designation of the first position, the total current consumption amount of the current that is energized to the drive unit that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even when it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the allowable amount depending on the capacity of the power supply from the state below or below the allowable amount, the main control is performed based on the instruction input from the main control means. By controlling the energization or interruption of current to the drive means for the peripheral control means that can know the status of the means, the total amount of current consumed by energizing the drive means in the entire gaming machine can be There is an effect that it is possible to control the amount allowed by the capacity, that is, to be less than (or less than) the maximum current consumption allowed for the entire gaming machine.
According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the third or fourth aspect, the following effect is produced. Depending on the value of the counter, [(total number of drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled) − (number of drive means whose total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source)] Current supply to the corresponding number of driving means is interrupted. That is, the current can be supplied to only a number of drive means that always has a maximum amount of current consumption by energizing the drive means that is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply. In such control of the total current consumption, the initial value of the counter is determined by the driving means in which a current energization instruction is started before the detection, or the drive that is continuously energized before the detection. The value is set on the basis of the allocation information storage means so that the power cut-off instruction information is assigned to the means. As a result, the current that has been supplied to the drive means that has been instructed to energize the current before the detection, or the drive means that has continued to be supplied before the detection is always cut off first. Become. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. As a result, there is an effect that the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in which the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 are opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 16 of the pachinko machine 10. Here, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the game board 16 and the glass unit 17 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 12 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame 20 (see FIG. 4A) combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and the outer frame 12 is substantially the same as the outer frame 12. And an inner frame 13 having the same outer shape. The inner frame 13 is obtained by attaching a passage forming member 36, a ball launching unit 90, and the like to an inner frame base 30 made of synthetic resin having a central window 30a opened in a substantially circular shape at the center thereof. A game board 16 having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is attached to the inner frame 13 from the back side, and the front surface of the game board 16 is visible from the central window 30a of the inner frame 13. A game ball is played by the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 16.

  Further, the inner frame 13 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 12 at two locations, upper and lower, on one side (left side in front view in the pachinko machine 10), and the inner frame 13 is attached so as to be openable to the front front side. On the front side of the inner frame 13, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 13. The front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 open and close the front surface of the inner frame 13. It is attached as possible.

  The front frame 14 is a synthetic resin front frame base 200 assembled with decorative resin components, electrical components, and the like, and has a substantially circular opening (window portion 14c) at a substantially central portion thereof. ing. A glass unit 17 (see FIG. 21) having two sheet glasses 151 is disposed on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 16 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the sheet glass 151. It has become.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 201 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape projecting forward to open the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 201. The bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in the front view where the ball launch unit 90 for launching the game ball is located, and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 201 is guided to the ball launch unit 90. The

  In the lower tray unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper tray 201, a lower tray 301 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 201 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 301, an operation handle 310 that is operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front surface of the game board 16 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 310, a launch solenoid 92 of a ball launch unit 90 is provided. And a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 310 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 310 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. The launch solenoid 92 is for firing a game ball with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 310, and thereby the amount of flight corresponding to the player's operation. A game ball is driven into the front of the game board 16.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 16 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and rails 61 and 62 for guiding a game ball, a general winning opening 63, and a liquid crystal display. The first symbol display device 81 and the like constituted by a display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) are assembled. An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 16, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 16, and the game board 16 and the glass unit 17 (the plate glass 151) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 having a first symbol display device 81 is disposed in the central portion of the game area, and the variable display device unit 80 is controlled by a display control device 505 described later, so that a plurality of types can be obtained. A variation display in which the symbols as the identification information vary according to a predetermined order is displayed on the display screen of the first symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the first symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a game ball can enter is disposed. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 524 (see FIG. 30) provided on the back side of the game board 16 is turned on, and the symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 81 described above. Fluctuation display is started. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 game balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the game ball entering the first entrance, and when the lottery is won, the first symbol display device 81 preliminarily changes after the symbol changes. One of the determined symbol combinations is displayed to indicate to the player that the jackpot has been generated, and then the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which the game ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won).

  In the specific winning opening 65a, a normal area and a V zone as the specific area are separately provided. If the game ball passes through the V zone while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the continuation right is granted. After the establishment of the specific winning opening 65a, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the display result after the change of the first symbol display device 81 matches one of the predetermined symbol combinations, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a when the game ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a is predetermined for a predetermined time. A gaming state that is released a number of times may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Next, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be roughly divided into an outer frame 12, an inner frame 13, a game board 16, a front frame 14, a lower tray unit 15, and a glass unit 17, and then the configuration on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Will be described. First, the configuration of the outer frame 12 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 2 and 4. Here, FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the outer frame 12, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 12 that forms an outer shell thereof, and an inner frame 13 is supported by the outer frame 20 so as to be opened and closed. In the game hall, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 20 is fixed to an installation location called an island of the game hall. Since the inner frame 13, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 12, Inspection and adjustment are performed with the inner frame 13 and the like opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 12.

  The outer frame 12 is composed of a wooden plate material that forms four sides on the top, bottom, left, and right to form a rectangular wooden frame 20 as a whole, and hinges 21 and 22 and receiving brackets 23 and 23 are attached to the wooden frame 20. is there. The joint portion of the wooden frame 20 is fixed by a detachable fastener such as a small screw, and a part of the wooden frame 20 can be easily reused as compared with a structure that is fixed using a nail or a rivet. Yes. In the present embodiment, the outer dimension of the outer frame 12 is 809 mm (inner dimension of about 710 mm), and the outer dimension of the left and right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension of about 480 mm). The outer frame 12 may be made of a light metal such as aluminum or a resin.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, metal upper hinges 21 and lower hinges 22 are attached to the outer frame 12 at two upper and lower locations on the left side when viewed from the front to support the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is supported so as to be openable and closable by using the side on which the hinges 21 and 22 are provided as an opening / closing axis.

  The metal fittings 23 of the outer frame 12 are screwed into the upper and lower two places on one side of the inner side of the wooden frame 20 and away from the hinges 21 and 22 with screws. Each of the metal fittings 23 is formed by bending a metal plate, and as shown in FIG. 4B, a mounting portion 23a that is in close contact with the inner surface of the outer frame 12, and the inner surface side of the outer frame 12 from the mounting portion 23a. An engaging portion 23b that rises vertically toward the end, and a protruding portion 23c that protrudes toward the closing direction side of the inner frame 13 (the upper left side in FIG. 4B) at the distal end side of the engaging portion 23b. And. The front end portion of the inner frame collar member 411 (see FIG. 31) formed so as to project from the inner frame 13 in a hook shape is caught on the engaging portion 23b of the receiving metal 23, and the inner frame 13 is closed.

  The protruding portion 23c of the metal fitting 23 has an inner frame flange toward the inner surface side (the lower left side in FIG. 4B) of the outer frame 12 in a state where the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 12. It is formed so as to protrude more than the length overlapping the tip portion protruding downward of the member 411. For this reason, the movement of the distal end portion of the inner frame collar member 411 toward the inner surface side of the outer frame 12 is restricted by the protruding portion 23c, and the protruding amount of the metal fitting 23 toward the inner surface side of the outer frame 12 is reduced. It is prevented that the inner frame collar member 411 is accidentally detached from the receiving metal fitting 23 due to the shakiness of 13 and the inner frame 13 is inadvertently opened.

  On the lower side of the outer frame 12, a decorative plate 24 formed of a horizontally long synthetic resin, specifically, an ABS resin plate, is fixed from the back side of the outer frame 12 with screws that penetrate the wooden frame 20. Yes. Due to the decorative plate 24, most of the outer frame 12 exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is made of synthetic resin like the inner frame 13, the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, and a sense of unity is provided between the members. Born to improve appearance quality. Although omitted in the present embodiment, different external shapes can be used while sharing the wooden frame 20 which is the wooden portion of the outer frame 12 by applying a pattern following the shape of the lower dish unit 15 on the front surface of the decorative plate 24. Can be manufactured, and the appearance quality of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved while effectively reusing the wooden frame 20.

  On the upper surface of the decorative plate 24, metal sliding plates 25 and 26 are provided at two locations, that is, an end portion on the side away from the hinge 22 and a central portion. Even if the opened inner frame 13 falls downward with respect to the outer frame 12 due to its own weight, when the inner frame 13 is closed, its lower surface is lifted while being rubbed against the sliding plates 25 and 26, and the inner frame 13 Guided to a fixed position. For this reason, it is not necessary for the operator to perform the closing operation while lifting the inner frame 13, and the convenience of the opening / closing operation of the inner frame 13 is enhanced. In addition, compared to the case where a part that guides the inner frame 13 to a fixed position is formed by a resin or wooden part, parts are prevented from being scraped or damaged due to rubbing due to repeated opening and closing operations. The opening / closing operation of the inner frame 13 can be easily performed over a long period of time.

  One of the two sliding plates 25, 26 is provided at an end portion on the side away from the hinges 21, 22 serving as the opening / closing shaft of the inner frame 13. For this reason, both lower end sides of the inner frame 13 are supported by the metal lower hinge 22 and the sliding plate 26, and the inner frame 13 is guided to a fixed position in a more stable state. Further, the other sliding plate 25 is provided at a substantially intermediate position between the hinge 22 and the sliding plate 26, and the most easily depressed portion is guided by the support of the hinge 22 and the sliding plate 26 provided at the end. It becomes. Thus, by providing the two sliding plates 25 and 26 at the end portion and the central portion on the upper surface of the decorative plate 24 on the side away from the hinge 22, the inner frame 13 can be reliably guided at a fixed position, Even if the weight applied to the inner frame 13 increases due to a large amount of game balls entering the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 301, the opening / closing operation of the inner frame can be easily performed.

  On the back side of the upper surface of the decorative plate 24, a rib 27 is provided so as to protrude upward to a position overlapping the lower end of the inner frame 13 along the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Further, a groove 27 a that is recessed toward the back surface along the upper surface of the decorative plate 24 is formed at the base portion of the rib 27, and the upper end portion of the rib 27 is formed so as to protrude toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10. For pachinko machines, fraudulent acts that are performed by inserting a thin plate-like tool or the like through a gap between members have been frequently reported. Since the rib 27 prevents the action of inserting etc., fraudulent acts can be prevented. Further, the tool inserted from between the inner frame 13 and the decorative plate 24 is likely to be fitted into the groove 27a provided at the base portion of the rib 27, which makes it more difficult to cheat.

  The height of the ribs 27 on the upper surface of the decorative plate 24 is set lower than the radius of the game ball with respect to the upper surface of the decorative plate 24. For this reason, even if a game ball is on the top surface of the decorative plate 24 when the inner frame 13 is closed, the game ball gets over the rib 27 after being sandwiched between the lower end portion of the inner frame 13 and the rib 27. Accordingly, the provision of the rib 27 prevents illegal actions, and the game ball is not sandwiched between the rib 27 and the inner frame 13 so that the trouble of reclosing the inner frame 13 does not occur. Convenience for the opening / closing operation can be kept high.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower dish set 15 removed. In FIG. 5, for convenience, a part of the configuration in the game area on the surface of the game board 16 is shown as blank.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an ABS resin-made inner frame base 30 formed in a rectangular shape, and a substantially circular central window 30 a is formed at the center of the inner frame base 30. An attachment portion for the game board 16 is provided on the back side of the inner frame base 30, and the game board 16 is detachably attached.

  The inner frame 13 is a door-like member that is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 12 by the upper hinge 21 and the lower hinge 22 of the outer frame 12 described above. The opening / closing axis of the inner frame 13 extends vertically on the left side of the front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with the hinges 21, 22, and the inner frame 13 is opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. The opening / closing axis of the inner frame 13 is set on the side (left side in front view) opposite to the operation handle 310 (see FIG. 1) provided on the right side in front view of the pachinko machine 10 so that the inner frame 13 can be opened more greatly. ing. Usually, in the pachinko hall, the pachinko machines 10 are arranged adjacent to each other. Therefore, when the opening / closing axis is provided on the operation handle 310 side, the operation handle 310 that moves along with the opening of the inner frame 13 moves to the adjacent pachinko machine 10 or the pachinko machine. This is because the amount of opening is limited by contacting a card unit or the like provided between the machines 10.

  An outer peripheral wall 30b is formed on the outer periphery of the inner frame 13 so as to project to the front side, and the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 are disposed inside the outer peripheral wall 30b. That is, in a state where the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 are attached to the inner frame 13, the outer periphery of each side surface of the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall 30 b of the inner frame 13. For this reason, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or a thin plate-like tool between the front frame 14 or the lower tray unit 15 and the inner frame 13, and it is possible to suppress fraud.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a wiring port 30 c is provided through the inner frame base 30 in the upper left portion of the inner frame 13. In the wiring port 30 c, wiring of components used for electrical decoration or the like of the front frame 14 is inserted into the back side of the inner frame 13 and connected to the back side of the game board 16. Rs are formed at the corners of the wiring port 30c, and even if each cord wired in the wiring port 30c is rubbed by the wiring port 30c by opening and closing the front frame 14, it is difficult to be damaged. The game board 16 (base plate 60) is also provided with a wiring port 60a at a position (upper left) corresponding to the wiring port 30c of the inner frame 13, and the gaming board 16 is attached to the inner frame base 30. Wiring is possible.

  On the upper right side of the wiring port 30 c of the inner frame 13, a push button type opening / closing switch 32 protruding in a columnar shape is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The open / close switch 32 is a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 14. When the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the open / close switch 32 is pressed against the back surface of the front frame 14, and conversely, the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. If it is, the open / close switch 32 is in a non-pressing protruding state and detects the open / closed state of the front frame 14. This open / close switch 32 is an island management device that collectively manages a lamp generally provided on the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 and a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall via an external output terminal on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Connected to etc. As a result, among the plurality of pachinko machines 10, only the pachinko machine 10 in the open state is turned on specially, or a signal is sent to the island management device to enlarge the pachinko machine 10 being opened by the surveillance camera. Or the like on the display screen, the crime prevention property against unauthorized opening of the pachinko machine 10 is enhanced.

  A substantially rectangular small window 30d is provided through the inner frame base 30 on the lower right side of the central window 30a of the inner frame 13, and a part of a substantially square is chamfered on the lower left side of the central window 30a. A small window 30 e having a shape is provided through the inner frame base 30. Adhesive spaces K1, K2 (see FIG. 3) for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 16, and are attached to the adhering spaces K1, K2. Since the certificate paper or the like is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the small windows 30d and 30e of the inner frame 13, the certificate paper or the like can be viewed with the front frame 14 opened. In addition, even after the game board 16 is attached to the inner frame base 30, it is possible to stick a stamp or the like on the sticking spaces K 1 and K 2 of the game board 16 through the small windows 30 d and 30 e.

  The lower side of the central window 30a of the inner frame base 30 is formed in a concave shape with the front side open, and a flat mounting surface 30f is formed on the back side. A ball launch unit 90 for launching game balls to the front surface of the game board 16, a passage forming member 36 that forms a passage for discharging game balls to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 301, and the like are attached to the attachment surface 30 f. .

  As shown in FIG. 5, three support fittings 33 to 35 are attached to the left end portion of the inner frame 13 at three locations along the vertical direction as a mechanism for supporting the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15. ing. The upper support fitting 33 is provided with a support hole 33a having a notch formed with a U-shaped opening on the front side of the sheet of FIG. 5 and having an inlet formed narrower than the back side, and the support hole 33a is stepped. The support bracket 33 on the front frame 14 side formed in a cylindrical shape is fitted.

  The second support fitting 34 from the top is provided with cylindrical projection shafts 34a and 34b that protrude in the vertical direction. The lower left corner of the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the protrusion shaft 34a protruding upward from the two protrusion shafts 34a and 34b, and the upper left corner of the lower plate unit 15 is internally supported by the protrusion shaft 34b protruding downward. It is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the frame 13.

  The lowermost support fitting 35 is formed by providing a support hole penetrating in the vertical direction in a horizontal metal plate protruding toward the front side of the inner frame 13. A support shaft 308 (see FIG. 27) to which a biasing force is applied so as to protrude downward by a spring is provided below the left end portion of the lower plate unit 15, and the support shaft 307 is provided in the support hole of the support fitting 35. The lower left corner of the lower plate unit 15 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a portion constituted by the outer frame 12, the inner frame 13, the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the glass unit 17, and the like is often referred to as a “frame”. When this “frame” portion is configured to be common to each manufacturer, different game boards 16 can be used depending on the type of game.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 16 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game board 16 is configured by assembling nails, windmills, winning holes 63, and the like to a base board 60 formed of a rectangular plywood, and the inner frame 13 with its peripheral edge abutting against the back side of the inner frame base 30. It is attached to the back side. The front center portion of the game board 16 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the central window 30 a of the inner frame base 30. The vertical length of the game board 16 is about 480 mm, and the length in the left-right direction is about 450 mm, which is the same size as the conventional one.

  The game board 16 is provided with the above-described general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, and the like disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the panel 16 with wood screws or the like. In addition to the above-described winning opening, the game board 16 is provided with an out opening 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. The game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 16 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (servants) such as a windmill are arranged.

  The variable display device unit 80 includes a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) in a variable manner with the passage of the game ball at the second entrance 67 as a trigger. There are provided a two symbol display device 82 and a first symbol display device 81 for variably displaying the first symbol (special symbol) triggered by winning at the first entrance 64. The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display portion 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time a game ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display symbol 83 displays a second symbol (second symbol). As the symbol “○” and “×” symbol are alternately lit, the variable display is performed, and when the variable display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, “○” symbol) The 1 entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times that the game ball passes through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is displayed on the hold lamp 84. Note that the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and a part of the first symbol display device 81 is used. May be performed. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the first symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 81 is performing the variable display of the first symbol, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times, The number of times of holding is indicated by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the first symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning entry to the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum holding number is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the first symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count.

  The display content of the first symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 505 described later, and for example, three symbol strings of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the first symbol is variably displayed on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 10A). It has come to be. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the first symbol display device 81. Is arranged.

  Next, the center frame 86 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the center frame 86. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the center frame 86. FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are exploded perspective views of the front base frame 850 and the rear base frame 800 that constitute a part of the center frame 86, respectively. 10A is a front view of the variable display device unit 80 as seen from the front, and FIG. 10B is a rear view of the center frame 86 as seen from the back side. 11 (a) to 11 (c) show a stage member 840 (FIG. 6) showing a rolling state of the game ball led out to the game board 16 from the ball passage 843, the notch portion 863b, and the drop portion 863c, respectively. (Ref.) It is a partial enlarged view of the periphery. In the following description of the center frame 86 and the like, the left and right directions are described as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the center frame 86 includes a rear base frame 800 disposed on the back side of the game board 16 and a front base frame 850 that is then assembled to the front surface of the base frame 800. . The rear base frame 800 and the front base frame 850 are each formed in a frame shape having an opening at the center, and the base frame 800 and 850 are assembled to form the center frame 86 as a whole in the front-rear direction. It is formed in a frame shape penetrating through. In addition, an upper decoration portion 890 is assembled to the front upper portion of the front base frame 850.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a stage mounting portion 810 is formed at the lower portion of the rear base frame 800. Four holes 811 penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface of the stage mounting portion 810 in the lateral direction. In this hole portion 811, an LED lamp 812 a provided on the LED substrate 812 for holding lamp is disposed. Two LED lamps 812 a are provided on the LED board 812 for holding lamps, and two LED boards 812 for holding lamps are assembled on the left and right rear surfaces of the stage mounting portion 810. An extension 813 that extends forward is formed at the lower edge of the stage mounting portion 810, and a notch 813 a is formed at the center of the effect portion 813.

  An upper stage 841 and a lower stage 844 are formed on the stage member 840 attached to the stage attaching portion 810 so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction. A spherical passage 843 extending in the vertical direction and shielded at the lower end is formed at the center of the upper stage 841, and the upper surface of the upper stage 841 is slightly inclined downward toward the spherical passage 843. On the other hand, the upper surface of the lower stage 844 has a width that allows two game balls to roll side by side in the front-rear direction, and has a smooth streamline shape. Further, the upper surface of the lower stage 844 has a symmetrical shape with the center portion as the center. Specifically, the central portion is raised upward, and the left and right sides thereof are valley portions 844a positioned on the lowermost side on the upper surface of the lower stage 844, and the left and right ends are positioned above the central portion. To do. A front-rear guide path 844b is formed at the center of the upper surface of the lower stage 844, extending in the forward and backward directions and having a shape inclined downward. That is, the front / rear guiding path 844b is formed in a mountain shape when viewed in the front / rear direction. On the other hand, the valley portions 844a located on the left and right of the central portion have a shape that is inclined downward toward the front. Since the valley portion 844a is configured as described above, the game ball guided by the valley portion 844a is led forward.

  When the stage member 840 is assembled to the rear base frame 800, the upper surface of the stage mounting portion 810 and the left and right side portions of the upper surface of the upper stage 841 are substantially flush with each other, and the ball passage 843 extends through the notch portion 813a. The structure protrudes downward from the portion 813. At this time, the front surface of the upper stage 841 is positioned in front of the LED lamp 812a disposed on the rear base frame 800. A total of four holding lamps 84 are formed on the front surface of the upper stage 841, two on the left and right sides, and the light emitted from the LED lamps 812a is visually recognized from the front through the corresponding holding lamps 84. can do. The LED lamps 812a are lit in order from the left every time the game balls pass through the second entrance 67, and when the game balls pass through the second entrance 67, all the LED lamps 812a are turned on. Light. The LED lamp 812a is turned off sequentially from the right each time the second symbol display device 82 performs variable display. Therefore, the number of times the variable display is held by the second symbol display device 82 is displayed by the light that is visually recognized through the hold lamp 84.

  Side wall portions 820 are formed on the left and right sides of the rear base frame 800. In the side wall portion 820, four holes 820a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the vertical direction. In this hole 820a, an LED lamp 822a provided on a decorative LED board 822 assembled from the back side of the side wall 820 is disposed. In addition, two screw insertion holes 820b opened in the front-rear direction are formed in the longitudinal direction inside the hole 820a.

  An LED cover 823 having a plane substantially the same shape as the front surface portion of the side wall portion 820 is assembled on the front surface side of both side wall portions 820, and further, a ball passage member 824 is assembled on the front surface side of the LED cover 823. It is done. Inside the LED cover 823, two insertion portions 823a that open in the front-rear direction are formed in the vertical direction, and on the outside, three curved concave portions 823b are formed in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the ball passage member 824 includes four leg portions 824a arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and a base portion 824b having a vertically long shape and connecting the four leg portions 824a. The leg portion 824a protrudes rearward with respect to the base portion 824b, and the protruding length is longer than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, a screw threaded portion 824c protruding rearward is formed at the protruding tip end portion of the leg portion 824a located at the uppermost portion and the lowermost portion.

  The LED cover 823 and the ball passage member 824 are assembled to the side wall portion 820 by inserting the screw threaded portion 824c through the insertion portion 823a and in this state the screw inserted through the screw insertion hole 820b from the back side. This is performed by screwing 825 to the screw threaded portion 824c. Thus, the LED cover 823 and the ball passage member 824 are assembled to the side wall portion 820, and the side ball passages 801 are formed on the left and right sides of the central opening of the rear base frame 800 (see FIG. 10A). In addition, the convex part which is not shown in figure is formed in the back surface part of the surface which the leg part 824a does not protrude, and also the recessed part 823b is formed in the LED cover 823 as mentioned above. The convex portion and the concave portion 823b are configured to face each other when the LED cover 823 and the ball passage member 824 are assembled to the side wall portion 820. Thereby, when the game ball falls in the side ball passage 801, the game ball comes into contact with the convex portion and the concave portion 823b, and the fall speed is reduced. In addition, since the ball passage member 824 is formed in a row of lattices, the game ball falling in the side ball passage 801 is visible from the outside. With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the side ball passage 801, it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious about the sudden disappearance of the game ball and becoming anxious.

  An upper frame 830 is formed on the upper portion of the rear base frame 800. On the back side of the upper frame 830, a relay board 188 for relaying various boards (reserved lamp LED board 812, decoration LED board 822, etc.) to be assembled to the center frame 86 is assembled. The upper frame portion 830 is formed with substantially rectangular openings 830a on the left and right sides. The openings 830a actuate door bodies 171 and 172, which will be described later, and these door bodies 171 and 172. This is used when assembling a member or the like to the center frame 86.

  In addition, screw insertion holes 800a are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rear base frame 800 at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment) in the vertical and horizontal directions. The screw insertion hole 800 a is used when the front base frame 850 is assembled to the rear base frame 800.

  A lower frame portion 860 is formed at the lower portion of the front base frame 850 assembled to the rear base frame 800, as shown in FIG. A substantially U-shaped recess 864 is provided at the center of the lower frame portion 860. Further, a front surface portion 863 extending vertically is provided on the front surface side of the lower frame portion 860.

  The bottom of the recess 864 is inclined downward from the rear to the front. In addition, a guide path 864a having a curved shape and extending in the front-rear direction is provided at a substantially central portion of the bottom of the recess 864. Since the recess 864 has the above-described configuration, the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 843 is led out to the game board 16 from a substantially central portion of the recess 864. On the other hand, an opening 863a for leading the game ball to the game board 16 is formed at the center of the front surface portion 863, and a substantially U-shaped notch 863b is formed at the top. Further, the shape of the upper end of the front surface portion 863 is substantially the same as the shape of the front end portion of the upper surface of the lower stage 844. Furthermore, a screw insertion hole 865 used when the center frame 86 is assembled to the game board 16 is provided at the lower portion of the front surface portion 863.

  As shown in FIG. 6, when the stage member 840 is assembled to the front base frame 850, the notch portion 863 b of the front surface portion 863 and the front end portion of the front-rear guide path 844 b of the lower stage 844 are flush with each other. Further, the most depressed drop portion 863c at the upper end of the front surface portion 863 is located on the front side of the valley portion 844a of the lower stage 844, and is further located below the valley portion 844a. As a result of rolling on the lower stage 844, in some cases, the game ball is led out to the game board 16 from the dropping portion 863c. Further, the left and right ends of the stage member 840 and the left and right ends of the lower frame portion 860 are flush with each other. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the side ball passage 801 described above is smoothly led out to the upper surface of the lower stage 844.

  A screw threaded portion (not shown) is formed outside the lower edge portion of the lower frame portion 860, and this screw threaded portion is used when the front base frame 850 is assembled to the rear base frame 800. The Specifically, the front base frame 850 to the rear base frame 800 is mounted by screwing the screw into the screw threaded portion with the screw inserted into the screw insertion hole 800a from the back side of the rear base frame 800. Is assembled.

  Side frame portions 870 are formed on both sides of the front base frame 850. A screw threaded portion 871 is formed on the outer upper portion of the both side frame portions 870. The screw threaded portion 871 is used when the front base frame 850 is assembled to the rear base frame 800. Specifically, the screw 872 is screwed to the screw screwing portion 871 in a state where the screw 872 is inserted from the back side of the rear base frame 800 into the screw insertion hole 800a.

  An upper frame portion 880 is formed on the upper portion of the front base frame 800. Front and rear sphere passages 881 extending in the front-rear direction are formed on the left and right sides of the upper frame portion 880. The front and rear sphere passage 881 guides a game ball that has passed through an upper sphere passage 851 described later to the side sphere passage 801. A decorative LED board 882 provided with three LED lamps 882a from the back side is attached to a substantially central portion of the upper frame portion 880. In addition, a decoration LED board 883 and an LED cover 884 are assembled to the back side of the central portion of the upper frame portion 880, respectively. The decoration LED substrate 883 is provided with three LED lamps 883a and two screw insertion lights 883b. The decorative LED board 883 is fixed to the LED cover 884 by screwing the screw 885 into the screw screwing portion 884a provided in the LED cover 884 with the screw 885 inserted through the screw insertion hole 883b of the decorative LED board 883. Is done. And these LED board 883 for decoration and LED cover 884 are assembled | attached to the upper frame part 880 so that the LED cover 884 may become the front side. A screw threaded portion 886 is formed on the upper edge portion outside the upper frame portion 880. The screw threaded portion 886 is used when the front base frame 850 is assembled to the rear base frame 800. Specifically, the screw 887 is screwed to the screw screw portion 886 in a state where the screw 887 is inserted from the back side of the rear base frame 800 into the screw insertion hole 800a.

  Further, on the front side of the side frame portion 870 and the upper frame portion 880, an extending portion 888 extending outward is formed. Similar to the front surface portion 863, the extension portion 888 is provided with a plurality of screw insertion holes 865 (five locations in the present embodiment) that are used when the center frame 86 is assembled to the game board 16. A plurality of screw insertion portions 889 (four in this embodiment) are formed on the front surface of the upper frame portion 880 and the extending portion 888. The screw insertion portion 889 is used when the upper decoration portion 890 is assembled to the upper frame portion 880.

  An upper decoration portion 890 is assembled on the front side of the upper frame portion 880. In the upper part of the upper decoration part 890, a passage forming part 891 having an open back is formed on the left and right. The inside of the passage forming portion 891 is wider than the diameter of the game ball, and both the left and right sides are located in front of the front and rear ball passages 881 when the upper decoration portion 890 is assembled to the upper frame portion 880. Moreover, the center of the upper side wall part of the channel | path formation part 891 is opened, and it has the structure which goes down along the left-right direction, respectively. In the central portion where the upper side wall portion is open, the lower side wall portions of the respective passage forming portions 891 are steeply inclined upward toward the central portion, and the joint between the lower side wall portions of the left and right passage forming portions 891 is When the upper decoration part 890 is attached to the upper frame part 880, it is positioned substantially in front of the screw threaded part 886. By assembling the upper decoration portion 890 to the upper frame portion 880, the passage forming portion 891 is positioned on the front side of the LED cover 884, and the open portion on the back side of the passage forming portion 891 is the upper frame portion 880 and the LED. Covered with a cover 884. As a result, an upper sphere passage 851 is formed (see FIG. 10A). In addition, a clearance 891 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided on the front surface side of the passage forming portion 891. By providing the gap 891a, the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the upper ball passage 851. Thereby, when a game ball passes the upper ball passage 851, it can suppress that the player feels anxiety that the game ball suddenly disappeared, and the like. Further, the gap 891a also serves as a viewing window that allows the LED lamp 883a assembled to the upper frame portion 880 to be visually recognized.

  A circular open portion 892 that is circular and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the upper decoration portion 890. An LED cover 893 having substantially the same shape as the circular opening 892 and having a hollow inside is assembled to the circular opening 892. When the upper decoration portion 890 is assembled to the upper frame portion 880, the LED cover 893 is positioned in front of the LED lamp 882a. Therefore, the light from the LED lamp 882a can be viewed from the front through the LED cover 893.

  On the lower side of the center of the upper decoration portion 890, a display portion 83 having a second pattern is formed. In addition, two hold lamps 894 are formed on the left and right sides of the display unit 83, respectively. An LED cover 895 is assembled to the display unit 83 and the holding lamp 894 from the back side. In addition, on the back side of the display unit 83, a second design LED board 896 provided with two LED lamps 896 a is assembled via an LED cover 895. On the other hand, on the back side of each holding lamp 894, a holding lamp LED substrate 897 is assembled via an LED cover 895 so that a holding lamp 85 is provided for each holding lamp 894. The holding lamp LED substrates 897 are assembled one by one on the left and right, and two holding lamps 85 are provided on each holding lamp LED substrate 897.

  As described above, the display unit 83 plays a role as a display unit of the second symbol display device 82, and displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). To display. Each time the game ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the display unit 83 in a variable manner by alternately lighting the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X”. . Specifically, when the game ball passes through the second entrance 67, the LED lamp 896a assembled on the back of the portion marked with “◯” and “x” is alternately turned on, and finally Thus, only the LED lamp 896a corresponding to one of the symbol “◯” or the symbol “x” is turned on. When such a variation display of the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opened). Configured). In addition, as described above, the variable display on the display unit 83 is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 84.

  The holding lamp 85 is an LED lamp corresponding to the first symbol display device 81. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the number of the held balls is displayed when each of the holding lamps 85 is turned on. Specifically, every time a game ball passes through the first entrance 64, the holding lamp 85 is lit in order from the left, and the light is visually recognized from the front via the LED protection member 894. On the other hand, every time the first symbol display device 81 performs variable display, the hold lamp 85 is turned off sequentially from the right. Note that the hold lamp 85 may be configured to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 81.

  A screw screw portion (not shown) is formed on the back surface of the upper decoration portion 890. Assembling the upper decoration part 890 to the upper frame part 880 is performed by inserting a screw 898 through a screw insertion part 886 of the upper frame part 880 and screwing a screw 898 into a screw screwing part formed in the upper decoration part 890. Is done.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 5, the rear base frame 800 and the front base frame 850 assembled with various members, the stage member 840, the stage mounting portion 810 of the rear base frame 800, and the front base The frame 850 is assembled with being sandwiched between the lower frame portion 860. At this time, left and right protruding portions (not shown) of the stage member 840 are fitted into cutout portions (not shown) of the front base frame 850. Thus, by assembling the rear base frame 800, the stage member 840, and the front base frame 850, an upper sphere passage 851 and a side sphere passage 801 are formed, and an upper sphere passage 851, front and rear sphere passages 881, and side portions The spherical passage 801 and the upper surface of the lower stage 844 are connected.

  Here, the flow of the game balls on the upper surfaces of these passages 851, 881, 801 and the lower stage 844 will be described with reference to FIGS. According to the present embodiment, the game ball driven into the upper portion of the game board 16 by the player's operation is guided from above the center frame 86 to the upper ball passage 851 as shown by the dotted line in FIG. May be. This game ball is guided to the front side of the front and rear ball passage 881 through the upper ball passage 851. Then, the game ball is guided to the upper side of the side ball passage 801 through the front and rear ball passage 881 descending from the front to the rear. The game ball guided to the upper side of the side ball passage 801 falls in the side ball passage 801, reaches the left and right sides of the upper surface of the lower frame portion 860, and is led out to the upper surface of the lower stage 844. . As described above, a convex portion is formed on the rear surface portion of the leg portion 824a on which the leg portion 824a does not protrude, and the concave portion 823b is formed on the LED cover 823. When the game ball falls on 801, the game ball comes into contact with the convex portion and the concave portion 823b, so that the falling speed of the game ball is reduced. As a result, the game ball that has fallen through the side ball passage 801 is smoothly led out to the upper surface of the lower stage 844. The game ball led to the upper surface of the lower stage 844 is led to the game board 16 as a result of rolling as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 11 shows the state of rolling of the game ball led out from the left side ball passage 801 to the upper surface of the lower stage 844, but the upper surface of the lower stage 844 from the right side ball passage 801. The situation of the rolling of the game ball derived in the above is the same. Further, the rolling of the game ball is not limited to the rolling shown in FIG. 11, but naturally there are other rolling modes. However, even though there are various processes until the game ball is led to the game board 16, the lead-out location when the game ball is led to the game board 16 is similar to the three modes shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 11A, the game ball that has reached the left side of the upper surface of the lower frame portion 860 from the left side ball passage 801 is led out to the upper surface of the lower stage 844 as indicated by the dotted line. Then, the game ball led out to the upper surface of the lower stage 884 moves to the right along the upper surface of the lower stage 844 and reaches the vicinity of the right end on the upper surface of the lower stage 844. The game ball that has reached the vicinity of the right end is reversed and moves to the left toward the center. Then, the game ball that has reached the center in a state in which the speed is substantially zero descends the slope on the rear side of the front-rear guide path 844b and is guided to the ball path 843. The game ball guided to the ball passage 843 falls downward along the ball passage 843 and is guided to the recess 864. The game ball guided to the recess 864 is guided forward along the guide path 864a and led out to the game board 16 from the front end portion of the guide path 864a.

  In FIG. 11B, as in the case of FIG. 11A, the game ball that has reached the left side portion of the upper surface of the lower frame portion 860 from the left side ball passage 801 is shown in the lower stage as shown by the dotted line. It moves to the right along the upper surface of 844, reverses in the vicinity of the right end portion of the upper surface of the lower stage 844, and reaches the center with the speed being almost zero. The game ball that has reached the central portion descends the front side of the front-rear guide path 844b and is led out to the game board 16 from the notch 863b of the front base frame 850.

  In FIG. 11 (c), as in the case of FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b), as shown by the dotted line, the gaming machine that has reached the left side portion of the upper surface of the lower frame portion 860 from the left side ball passage 801. Moves to the right along the upper surface of the lower stage 844, reverses in the vicinity of the right end of the upper surface of the lower stage 844, and reaches the center. The game ball that has reached the center further moves to the left beyond the center and moves to the valley 844a on the left. As described above, the valley portion 844a has a shape that is inclined downward toward the front, so that the game ball that has reached the left valley portion 844a rolls left and right around the valley portion 844a. While being guided forward. Then, the game ball that has reached the drop portion 863c of the front base frame 850 is led out to the game board 16 from the drop portion 863c. In this case, the mode is derived from the left drop unit 863c to the game board 16, but there may be a mode derived from the right fall unit 863c to the game board 16.

  Among the above three modes, in the case of FIGS. 11A and 11B, the first entrance 64 is located below the guide path 864a and the notch 863c. In comparison, entering the first entrance 64 is likely to occur.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 7, 10, 12, and 13, as described above, door bodies 171, 172 that are substantially rectangular plate-like bodies provided in the center frame 86, and these A member for operating the door bodies 171 and 172 will be described. FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram showing a drive mechanism of the door bodies 171 and 172, and FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an operating state of the door bodies 171 and 172.

  The center frame 86 is provided with a pair of left and right door bodies 171 and 172 so as to overlap a part of the display screen of the first symbol display device 81. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the right door body 171 is appropriately referred to as “right door 171”, and the left door body 172 is referred to as “left door 172”.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both substantially rectangular plate-like bodies having the same size, and the right corner on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81. A right door 171 is provided at the part, and a left door 172 is provided at the left corner. In the center frame 86, at least the upper side of the display screen G projects forward from the game board 16, and the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed directly below the projecting portion (projected portion). The right door 171 and the left door 172 are spaced apart from each other by a space having substantially the same size as the doors 171 and 172. When the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is divided into 9 parts by dividing the display screen G vertically and horizontally, the right door 171 and the left door 172 generally have the size of one area out of the 9 parts. Have. That is, by disposing the right door 171 and the left door 172 so as to overlap the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81, the display screen G is about 2/9 (2 × about 1/9). ) Area is hidden.

  The procedure for assembling the door bodies 171 and 172 (the right door 171 and the left door 172) to the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the left and right rear surfaces of the upper frame portion 880 of the front base frame 850, a right door solenoid 177 for operating the door body 171 (right door 171) and a left for operating the door body 172 (left door), respectively. A door solenoid 184 is assembled. The right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 include output shafts 178 and 185 and springs 179 and 186, respectively. The output shaft 178 and the output shaft 185 include a movable connecting portion 174 and a movable connecting portion 180 having two links 175 and 176 and links 182 and 183, respectively, and an opening 830a of the rear base frame 800. It is assembled so as to straddle. This assembly is performed by connecting the first links 175 and 182 to the output shafts 178 and 185, respectively. Further, the second links 175 and 182 in the movable connecting portions 174 and 185 are respectively provided on the rear side of the rear base frame 800, with arm portions 171b and 171b of the door bodies 171 (right door 171) and 172 (left door 172). 172b is assembled with a screw 187. The door body 171 (right door 171) and the door body 172 (left door 172) are rotated around the rear base frame 800 by shafts 171a and 172a provided at the base end portions by supporting shafts 173 and 181, respectively. It is supported movably. Further, in order to prevent the door body 171 (the right door 171) and the door body 172 (the left door 172) from being detached rearward, fixing members 189 and 190 that cover the shaft portion 171a and the shaft portion 172b are assembled. . The fixing members 189 and 190 are assembled by inserting screws 192 and 193 from the back side into the screw insertion holes 189a and 190a provided in the fixing members 189 and 190, respectively. This is performed by screwing 193 to a screw screw portion (not shown) provided in the rear base frame 800. As a result, the door body 171 (right door 171) and the door body 172 (left door 172) are disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the frame-shaped portion penetrating in the front-rear direction of the center frame 86, respectively. That is, the door body 171 (right door 171) and the door body 172 (left door 172) are located directly below the upper frame portion 830 of the rear base frame 800 and the upper frame portion 880 of the front base frame 850. In addition, the shaft portions 171a and 172a, the arm portions 171b and 172b, the movable connecting portions 174 and 180, and the like are provided on the outer side along the side wall portion 820 and the upper frame portion 830. The display is arranged so as to surround the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81. The output shaft 178 of the right door solenoid 177 and the output shaft 185 of the left door solenoid 184 are extended by the urging force of the spring 179 and the spring 186, respectively. In this state, the door body 171 (right door 171) and The door body 172 (left door 172) is held in a state facing the display screen G, that is, in a state where a part of the display screen G is hidden.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the door body 171 (right door 171) and the door body 172 (left door 172) is demonstrated with reference to FIG.10 (b) and FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the drive mechanism of the door body 171 (right door 171) and the door body 172 (left door 172). FIG. 12 basically shows a cross section taken along the line AA of FIG. 10B, but for convenience of explanation, the peripheral wall 191 surrounding the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is omitted. ing. In FIG. 12, the right door 171 is illustrated as being closed and the left door 172 is illustrated as being open. Further, in FIG. 12, the first symbol display device 81 is attached to the frame cover 513 behind the game board 16, and a display control device 505 described later is installed behind the first symbol display device 41. Yes.

  In the right door 171 and the left door 172 having the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 12, for example, when the solenoid 184 on the left door 172 side is energized, the output shaft 185 resists the biasing force of the spring 186. In accordance with the contraction, the links 182 and 183 swing. Then, when the left door 172 rotates about the shaft portion 172a, the left door 172 shifts to an upright state with respect to the display screen G, and is in an open state as shown in FIG. The same applies to the operation of the right door 171. The first symbol display device 81 is provided at a position somewhat behind the surface of the game board 16, and the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 and the glass unit 17 (plate glass 151) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. A sufficient interval is secured between the two. Therefore, when the right door 171 and the left door 172 operate | move, the rotation operation to the front side can be performed without any trouble.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, a relay board 188 is provided between the drive mechanisms for the right door 171 and the left door 172. Via the relay board 188, drive signals are output independently to the right door solenoid 177 that drives the right door 171 and the left door solenoid 184 that drives the left door 172, respectively. In accordance with the drive signal, the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are energized, and as a result, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are independently opened and closed.

  When the right door 171 and the left door 172 independently shift from the closed state to the open state, the display form (size and shape of the image display area) is displayed on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81. Be changed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 13A illustrates a display form when both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are in the closed state. In this state, the right corner and the left corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 are hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, respectively. Only the central portion sandwiched between 172 is exposed. That is, about 2/9 of the entire screen area of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172.

  FIG. 13B illustrates a display form in a state where the right door 171 is opened and the left door 172 is closed. In this state, the upper left corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is hidden by the left door 172, and in the upper area of the display screen G, about 2/3 of the right side is exposed. Yes. FIG. 13C illustrates a display form in a state where the right door 171 is closed and the left door 172 is opened. In this state, the upper right corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is hidden by the right door 171, and about 2/3 of the left side is exposed in the upper area of the display screen G. Yes. That is, in the state of FIG. 13B and FIG. 13C, about 1/9 of the entire screen area of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is either the right door 171 or the left door 172. Hidden by.

  Further, FIG. 13D illustrates a display form in a state where both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened. In this state, since the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is not hidden by the right door 171 or the left door 172, the image display area is maximized and display using the full screen area is possible.

  As described above, the display form of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is changed according to the open / close state of the right door 171 and the left door 172. The longest display area in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen G remains. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, even when both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are closed, they are sandwiched between the right door 171 and the left door 172. The central part remains as a display area without being hidden. Therefore, even if the right door 171 and the left door 172 are provided so as to overlap the display screen G, the impression that the display screen G is reduced is relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effective display effect while effectively using the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81.

  Returning again to FIG. The variable winning device 65 opens and closes a specific winning port 65a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center thereof. Specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid 581 (see FIG. 47) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, a drive signal is output to the large opening solenoid 581. The large opening solenoid 581 is driven by energizing an excitation current according to the drive signal, tilts the open / close plate downward on the front surface, and temporarily forms an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. Then, it operates to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  The two rails 61 and 62 provided on the game board 16 are provided for guiding the game balls launched from the ball launch unit 90 to the upper part of the game board 16. A game ball launched in accordance with the turning operation of the operation handle 310 is guided to the game area via a path sandwiched between the two rails 61 and 62. Both rails 61 and 62 are made of a stainless steel metal band, and the inner rail 61 is fixed to the base plate 60 in a state of being bent into an annular shape excluding the upper right semicircle. The outer rail 62 is fixed to the base plate 60 such that a part (mainly the left side) faces the inner rail 61. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 mainly constitute a guide rail, and a ball that guides the game ball to the game area by a portion where the rails 61 and 62 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval (a portion on the left side). A guide passage is formed.

  A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the ball guide path between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 to the upper portion of the game board 16 returns to the ball guide path again. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed. A return rubber 69 is attached to the front end portion of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while the momentum is attenuated.

  In the lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 16, there are provided adhering spaces K1, K2 for adhering seals or plates such as stamps. Since the game board 16 itself is provided with sticking spaces K1, K2 such as stamps, the game board 16 can be uniquely identified by the stamps, etc., and it is easy to find an exchange for an illegal game board 16. Can do.

  Next, the game area will be described. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed in front of the game board 16 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70. In this embodiment, the game area is a guide rail that is a parallel part of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 in the area surrounded by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the arc member 70 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The area is excluded. Therefore, in the case of a game area, the guide rail portion is not included, and the left limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail 61 instead of the outer rail 62. Similarly, the right limit position toward the game area is specified by the arc member 62. Further, the lower limit position of the game area is specified by the inner rail 61. The upper limit position of the game area is specified by the outer rail 62.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the distance from the upper end of the game area (the uppermost point of the outer rail 62) to the lower end of the game area (the lowermost point of the inner rail 61) is 445 mm (about 58 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the left end (the extreme left position of the inner rail 61) to the right end of the game area (the extreme right position on the inner surface of the arc member 70) is 418 mm (about 50 mm longer than the conventional product). In other words, the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be much larger by extending in the left-right direction and the up-down direction than before. Therefore, a windmill, the second entrance 67, a plurality of nails (such as a guide nail for guiding the game ball to the center), and other accessories can be arranged in various ways, and the behavior of the game ball can be varied. You can make the ball game more interesting.

  Here, the width of the game area is desirably at least 380 mm. More preferably, it is 390 mm or more, 400 mm or more, 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and further 460 mm or more. Of course, it may be 470 mm or more. That is, the width of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of expanding the game area. The height of the game area is preferably at least 400 mm. More preferably, it is 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and more preferably 460 mm or more. Of course, it is good also as 470 mm or more, 480 mm or more, and 490 mm or more. That is, the height of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of expanding the game area. In addition, about the combination of the said width | variety and height, it is good also as what combined the said numerical value arbitrarily.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the area of the game area to the surface of the game board 16 is about 70%, which is much larger than the conventional area ratio. Since the area ratio of the game area to the surface of the game board 16 has been only about 50% in the past, it can be said that the game area is considerably expanded on the premise that the game board 16 is shared. It should be noted that the external shape of the pachinko machine 10 is almost uniform among manufacturers for the convenience of installation in the game hall, and in the situation where the size of the game board 16 must be the same, the surface of the game board 16 as described above. Increasing the ratio of the area of the gaming area to about 20% is very significant from the viewpoint of expanding the gaming area. Here, the ratio is preferably at least 60% or more. More preferably, it is 65% or more, More preferably, it is 70% or more. Further, if it is 75% or more exceeding the case of this embodiment, it is more desirable. Further, it may be 80% or more.

  Moreover, the ratio of the area of the game area to the area of the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is about 40%, which is a much larger area ratio than before. The area ratio of the game area to the area on the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is desirably 35% or more. Of course, it may be 40% or more, 45% or more, or 50% or more.

  The second entrances 67 (through gates) located on both sides of the variable display device unit 80 have a guide mechanism for bringing the passed game balls to the center of the game area. This guide mechanism is configured by providing an inclined surface descending toward the center side of the game area below the second entrance 67. As a result, even if the game area is expanded in the left-right direction by providing a large LCD at the center of the game area in the variable display device unit 80, the game ball is moved to the first entrance 64 on the center side of the game area or variable. It is possible to guide to the winning device 65, and as a result, it becomes difficult to win a game ball due to the expansion of the game area, or the game ball's behavior is narrowed and the behavior of the game ball becomes monotonous. Can be suppressed.

  Next, referring mainly to FIGS. 5 and 14 to 18, a ball launch unit 90, a passage forming member 36, and a relay board which are mounted on the lower part of the front side of the inner frame base 30 and constitute a part of the inner frame 13. 38 will be described. 14 is a front view of the ball launching unit 90, FIG. 15 is a perspective view thereof, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view thereof. 17 is a perspective view of the ball launching unit 90 in a state where the opening / closing member 102 constituting the ball feeding mechanism 94 is opened. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the ball feeding mechanism with the lid member 103 removed from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of a ball launch unit 90 showing the internal configuration of 94.

  The ball launch unit 90 includes a base plate 91 fixed to the attachment surface 30f below the inner frame base 30 with screws, a launch solenoid 92 attached to the base plate 91, and a longitudinal direction of the launch solenoid 92 on one end side of the launch solenoid 92. A launch rail 93 having a substantially M-shaped cross section that is attached and fixed to the base plate 91 so as to extend parallel to the base plate 91, and guides the game balls one by one to the base end portion (the end portion on the launch solenoid 92 side) of the launch rail 93 A ball feeding mechanism 94 for guiding, and a positioning member 95 (see FIG. 17) attached to the base plate 91 so as to support and position the game ball placed on the base end portion of the firing rail 93 are provided. Yes.

  The base plate 91 is formed by pressing a metal flat plate such as a zinc alloy, and is fixed by screws 96 in a state of being in close contact with the mounting surface 30 f of the inner frame base 30. As shown in FIG. 16, the base plate 91 is provided with a fastening hole for inserting the screw 96, and the boss 91a and the bolt 91b for fixing the firing solenoid 92 and the firing rail 93 are secured. The boss 91c is fixed.

  The mounting position of the base plate 91 is desired to be highly accurate so as to be stable with respect to the inner frame base 30 even when many pachinko machines 10 are manufactured. When the relative position with respect to the game board 16 changes for each pachinko machine 10, the jump amount of the game ball fired by the launch solenoid 92 differs accordingly, and the jump amount of the game ball corresponding to the turning operation of the operation handle This is because each pachinko machine 10 becomes unstable. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the base plate 91 is made larger than the conventional one, and the relative mounting position with the inner frame base 30 is stabilized. Specifically, the lower end of the base plate 91 extends below the pivot axis (position indicated by AH in FIG. 5) of the operation handle 310, and the right end thereof is substantially the same as the right end of the game board 16, Its left end extends to the left side from the out port 66 so as to cross the center of the game area, and its upper end extends to a position close to the lower end of the game board 16. Further, the number of screws 96 for fixing the base plate 91 is increased (six) from the conventional one. Further, the fastening position of each screw 96 (see FIG. 5) is separated from the conventional one. For example, the fastening position of the lower screw 96 is below the rotation axis AH of the operation handle 310, and the mounting position is stable. We are trying to make it.

  The firing rail 93 guides the game ball immediately after being fired by the firing solenoid 92, and extends to a boss 91c fixed to the base plate 91 so as to extend linearly while maintaining a predetermined launch angle (launch angle). It is fixed with screws (not shown). A game ball that is launched in accordance with the turning operation of the operation handle 310 is first launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 93, and then through the guide rail formed between the two rails 61 and 62 as described above. Guided to the gaming area.

  Here, in the case of this pachinko machine 10, it has already been described that the game area is greatly expanded as compared with the conventional case, but in such a configuration, the distance between the launch position of the game ball and the game area becomes closer and the launch rail becomes shorter. It tends to be. If the launch rail 93 is short, the ball guiding distance is shortened and the variation of the launch ball is increased. Therefore, a device for stabilizing the launch ball is required. In this embodiment, the launch position of the game ball is lowered and the inclination angle (launch angle) of the launch rail 93 is made somewhat larger than that of the existing one (that is, the launch rail 93 is raised). The length of the ball is about 240 mm to ensure a sufficiently long ball guiding distance. Thereby, the game ball launched from the launching device can be guided to the guide rail in a more stable state. In this case, in particular, the launch rail 93 is formed to extend from the launch position of the game ball hit by the launch solenoid 92 to a position beyond the center position (out port 66) of the game area.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as a launching device for launching a game ball, a single unit solenoid (launching solenoid) in which a linear solenoid is housed in a case member, instead of a combination of a motor and a launching rod that are generally used conventionally. 92 is adopted. The firing solenoid 92 is provided with a metal plunger 92a disposed parallel to the firing rail 93 and a longitudinal direction, and a resin cap 92b covering the tip of the plunger 92a. As the material of the cap 92b, a polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is employed in the present embodiment. While the player is turning the operation handle 310, the firing solenoid 92 repeats excitation and de-excitation every predetermined time, and the plunger 92a is repeatedly raised and lowered accordingly. When the plunger 92 a protrudes, the game ball positioned on the launch rail 93 by the positioning member 95 is launched toward an obliquely upward direction directed by the launch rail 93. A variable resistor linked to the operation handle 310 is connected to the firing solenoid 92, and the protruding speed of the plunger 92a is adjusted based on the operation amount of the operation handle 310 (the stroke amount is substantially constant), and the game ball is fired. The speed and thus the jump amount is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 310.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the firing solenoid 92 is fixed to a pair of bosses 91 a and bolts 91 b erected on the base plate 91 by attaching bolts 97 and nuts 98. The firing solenoid 92 is provided with a fastening hole 92c through which the bolts 91b and 97 are inserted at positions corresponding to the boss 91a and the bolt 91b. In the ball launching unit 90, the height of the firing solenoid 92 relative to the base plate 91 is made different by adjusting the tightening of the bolts 97 and nuts 98 provided above and below the firing solenoid 92, so that the plunger 92a and the firing rail 93 The relative mounting position can be adjusted, and the hitting point of the game ball can be adjusted. Even when there are variations in manufacturing and assembling of each part during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10, the ball launch unit 90 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 and then the bolts 97 and nuts 98 are adjusted to reduce the flying amount of the game ball. Can be adjusted. The firing solenoid 92 is entirely disposed inside the outer peripheral edge of the base plate 9l. When the ball firing unit 90 is assembled to the inner frame base 30 from the base plate 91 side, the firing solenoid 92 is another part. It is prevented from being caught and damaged.

  The positioning member 95 is a member for supporting the game ball placed on the right end portion (base end portion) of the firing rail 93 and positioning the game ball at the striking position, as shown in FIG. The base plate 91 is formed so as to protrude in a columnar shape on the surface side on which the firing rail 93 is provided. The positioning member 95 is provided with a fastening hole penetrating along the axial direction, and the positioning member 95 is screwed to the base plate 91 by inserting a screw into the fastening hole. Here, the fastening hole of the positioning member 95 is formed not at the center of the columnar shape but at an eccentric position. For this reason, it is possible to slightly change the hitting position of the game ball placed on the firing rail 93 by rotating the positioning member 95 as appropriate and then tightening the screw. Later, it is possible to easily adjust the jump amount of the game ball.

  The ball feeding mechanism 94 feeds the game balls continuously guided from the upper plate 201 to the base end portion of the launch rail 93 one by one. The ball feeding mechanism 94 is made of a resin base member 101 fixed to the base plate 91 so as to cover the upper part of the firing solenoid 92, and is pivotally supported on one side (right side in FIG. 14) of the base member 101 to open and close. And a resin opening / closing member 102 configured to be capable of being used. The base member 101 is integrally formed with a locking claw 101a toward the front side where the opening / closing member 102 is provided. The opening / closing member 102 has a locking claw 101a in a closed state overlapping the front surface of the base member 101. A locking hole 102a is formed to be hooked. Normally, the opening / closing member 102 is in a closed state in which one side is pivotally supported by the pedestal member 101 and the other side is locked to the pedestal member 101 by the locking hole 102a and overlaps and is fixed to the front surface of the pedestal member 101. This closed state is released by removing the locking claw 101 a of the base member 101 from the locking hole 102 a of the opening / closing member 102, and the opening / closing member 102 can be opened forward with respect to the base member 101. Further, the opening / closing member 102 can be slid upward to be detached from the pedestal member 101 by being opened to the maximum with respect to the pedestal member 101.

  The lower part of the pedestal member 101 is formed in a shape inclined downward toward the front side of the lower dish unit 15 while covering the upper gap between the lower dish unit 15 and the mounting surface 30f of the inner frame base 30. Further, on the left side of the pedestal member 101 when viewed from the front, the passage forming member 36 covers the upper gap between the lower plate unit 15 and the mounting surface 30 f of the inner frame base 30 on the left side of the pedestal member 101, and the front surface of the lower plate unit 15. It is formed in a shape that is inclined downward toward the side. For this reason, when the front frame 14 is opened, even if the game ball falls on the part of the ball launching unit 90, the game ball does not enter the back side of the lower dish unit 15 and flows out to the front side. .

  As shown in FIG. 14, the front surface of the opening / closing member 102 is provided with an introduction port 102b for introducing a game ball guided from the upper plate 201 at the left end of the front view. Is introduced to the back side of the opening / closing member 102. As shown in FIG. 17, a lid member 103 is detachably attached to the back surface side of the opening / closing member 102, and the lid magnet 103 covers the electromagnet 104 and the delivery member 105. The electromagnet 104 and the delivery member 105 are members that operate to send out the game balls one by one. As shown in FIG. 18, the electromagnet 104 and the delivery member 105 are moved up and down with the electromagnet 104 facing upward in the accommodation space recessed in the opening / closing member 102. They are arranged side by side.

  The delivery member 105 is a resin-made member that is pivotally supported by a pin so that one side of the introduction port 102b can swing up and down with respect to the opening / closing member 102, and only one game ball is provided on one side of the introduction port. A holder portion 105a that is recessed so as to be accommodated is provided. A metal piece 106 is attached to the upper side portion connecting the shaft portion through which the pin is inserted and the holder portion 105 a so as to face the electromagnet 104.

  When the electromagnet 104 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 106 is pulled so as to stick to the electromagnet 104, and the delivery member 105 rotates upward. When game balls are continuously introduced from the introduction port 102b, the top game ball is accommodated in the holder portion 105a and the vertical movement is restricted, and the subsequent game balls are supported by the game ball accommodated in the holder portion 105a. The flow is regulated.

  When the electromagnet 104 is turned off (de-energized) while the game ball is accommodated in the holder portion 105a, the delivery member 105 rotates downward due to its own weight, and the game ball accommodated in the holder portion 105a flows downward. To do. At this time, since the transition of the subsequent game ball to the holder portion 105 a is restricted by the upper side of the delivery member 105, only one ball accommodated in the holder portion 105 a is sent downward by the vertical movement of the delivery member 105. The game ball sent out downward is guided onto the firing rail 93 via a delivery port 102c (see FIG. 17) formed by the opening / closing member 102 and the lid member 103. Therefore, when the excitation and de-excitation of the electromagnet 104 are repeated, the game balls are guided one by one onto the launch rail 93 in synchronization with the repetition, and the launch solenoid 92 is excited in synchronization with the on / off of the electromagnet 104. Thus, the game balls on the launch rail 93 can be launched one by one toward the game area.

  Next, the passage forming member 36 provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. The passage forming member 36 includes a lower tray discharge passage (not shown) for discharging the game balls to the lower plate 301 when the upper plate 201 is full, and a foul ball for discharging the foul balls to the lower plate 301. It is a member for forming a passage (not shown). Here, the foul ball means a game ball that returns to the launch rail 93 side without reaching the entrance of the game area where the return ball prevention member 68 is located because the launch force (launch force) at the time of launch is weak. Yes.

  A gap of about 40 mm is formed between the launch rail 93 and the rails (guidance rails) 61 and 62 on the front surface of the game board 16, and a foul ball passage is provided below the gap. A passage forming member 36 made of a transparent resin is fixed to the mounting surface 30f of the inner frame base 30 with a screw on the front surface of the inner frame 13 and on the left side of the ball launching unit 90. The passage forming member 36 is provided with a groove opened toward the mounting surface 30f side of the inner frame 13, and a foul ball passage is formed by the groove and the mounting surface 30f of the inner frame base 30. The foul ball passage joins a lower tray discharge passage that guides game balls overflowing from the upper plate 201 from the middle to the lower plate 301. A lower tray discharge port 36a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting surface 30f toward the front side of the inner frame base 30 is provided at the most downstream portion of the lower tray discharge passage. Is discharged to the lower plate 301 from the lower plate discharge port 36a.

  In the middle of the discharge passage, a full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 301 is full of game balls is provided so as to form a part of the passage bottom surface. When a large amount of game balls are paid out in a short period of time, game balls start to accumulate in the lower plate 301 after the upper plate 201 is full. After that, even if the game balls continue to be paid out, if the game balls in the lower plate 301 are not pulled out, the game balls start to collect in the discharge passage. This is stopped by the control of the payout launch control device 611 (see FIG. 31). If the game ball continues to be paid out even if the discharge passage is full, the lower plate 301 overflows and it becomes difficult to continue the game, or the game ball gets stuck in the gear for paying out the game ball This is because problems are likely to occur. When the full tank of the discharge passage is detected by the full tank sensor, an error message “please remove the ball” is repeatedly output from the speaker SP (see FIG. 2) under the control of the payout launch control device 611. The player can be shown that the game balls have accumulated in the lower plate 301, and can be prompted to take out the game balls from the lower plate 301.

  An upper tray discharge port 36b for discharging game balls to the upper plate 201 is provided in the upper left part of the passage forming member 36, and the inner frame base 30 is used for paying out game balls to the upper plate discharge port 36b. There is a payout exit. The payout opening of the inner frame base 30 connects the back surface and the front surface of the inner frame base 30, and is connected to a payout device 658 (see FIG. 28) provided on the back surface side of the inner frame 13. The payout opening and the upper tray discharge port 36b communicate with the upper plate 201 in a state in which the front frame 14 is closed, and the game ball is discharged (paid out) to the upper plate 201 through the discharge port and the upper plate discharge port 36b. . An open / close shutter 37 is attached to the upper plate discharge port 36b. When the front frame 14 is opened (the state shown in FIG. 2), the shutter 37 closes the upper plate discharge port 36b by an urging force such as a spring. . When the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 37 is tilted toward the inner frame base 30 and pushed open by a ball passage rod 241 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front frame 14. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10 in which the front decorative frame is omitted and the upper plate 201 is directly provided on the front frame 14, the game ball passing through the payout opening of the inner frame base 30 is opened when the front frame 14 is opened. Inconveniences such as spilling on the front surface of 13 can be prevented.

  On the lower side of the lower plate discharge port 36a in the passage forming member 36, a rib 36c having a length contacting the lower surface of the inner frame 13 is provided, and the mounting surface 30f of the inner frame base 30 formed in a flat plate shape is reinforced. Has been. Further, a gap through which the wiring passes is provided between the rib 36c and the mounting surface 30f, and the rib 36c is used as a holder for electric wiring.

  A relay board 38 is accommodated in the lower left corner of the front surface of the inner frame base 30. On the relay board 38, wiring of electrical components (touch sensor and variable resistor inside the operation handle 310 and the speaker SP) provided in the lower tray unit 15 and a control device (payout launch control) provided on the inner frame 13 side are provided. It is a part which connects the apparatus 611 and the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 562), and the insertion port (not shown) connected with the connector provided in the wiring cord front end by the side of the lower pan unit 13 is provided. Since the electrical connection between the lower tray unit 15 and the inner frame 13 is gathered on the relay substrate 38, the wiring work when assembling and removing the lower tray unit 15 is simplified, and the pachinko machine 10 is assembled and removed. Disassembly is easy. In addition, the relay board 38 is provided with a switch for adjusting the volume of the speaker SP in two levels, so that the volume can be easily adjusted without opening the inner frame 13. The wiring from the relay board 38 to the control device provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 is arranged along the lower end of the mounting surface 30f of the inner frame base 30 and on the inner side of the rib 36c of the passage forming member 36. The inner frame base 30 is routed around the back surface of the inner frame 13 through a wiring hole 30 h formed in the lower right corner of the front surface.

  Next, the configuration of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 19, and 20. FIG. 19A is a rear view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 19B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the outlet of the upper plate 201 that sends out the game ball to the ball launching unit 90. FIG. 20 (a) shows the state in which the front frame 14 is opened. 20 (b) shows a state in which the front frame is closed.

  The front frame 14 is mainly configured by a front frame base 200 made of ABS resin formed in a rectangular shape, and the front frame base 30 has a central portion so that most of the game area can be visually recognized from the outside. A window portion 14c having an elliptical opening is provided. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate | board 201 as a ball receiving tray is integrally provided under the window part 14c. The upper plate 201 temporarily stores the game balls and guides them to the ball launch unit 90 while aligning them in a row. In the conventional pachinko machine, a front decorative frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame is provided below the front frame, and an upper plate is provided on the front decorative frame, but in this embodiment, the front decorative frame is omitted, An upper plate 201 is provided directly on the frame 14. This is because the front frame 14 of the present embodiment includes a window portion 14c that is largely oval shaped so that a game area formed larger than a conventional pachinko machine can be visually recognized from the outside. The upper plate 201 is integrated with the front frame 14 so as to improve the strength of the plate as much as possible. Similar to the lower plate 301, the upper plate 201 has at least a surface layer formed of flame-retardant ABS resin.

  The window portion 14c of the front frame 14 has a vertically elongated elliptical shape in which a substantially central portion on the left and right sides is curved relatively gently as compared with the upper and lower sides. Since the front frame base 30 forming the window portion 14c is formed longer in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, the front frame base 30 has a narrow width that is easily broken at the top, bottom, left and right of the front frame base 200 while opening the window portion 14c. The part which becomes can be provided comparatively widely, and is making it easy to ensure intensity | strength. In addition, you may form in the linear form, without curving the substantially center part of the left-right side of the window part 14c.

  In the present embodiment, the upper end of the opening of the window portion 14c coincides with the uppermost portion of the outer rail 62 (the upper end of the game area), and the shortest distance between the upper end of the opening and the upper end of the front frame 14 (the so-called upper frame portion). The vertical width is about 50 mm. Compared to the prior art having an upper frame width of about 85 mm to 95 mm, the upper frame width is remarkably shortened, so that it is easy to secure the upper area of the game area and the large variable display device unit 80 can be disposed relatively upward. The distance from the upper end of the front frame 14 is desirably 80 mm or less, more desirably 70 mm or less, and further desirably 60 mm or less. Of course, as long as a predetermined strength can be ensured, it may be 50 mm or less.

  Further, the shortest distance between the left end of the window portion 14c and the left end of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (the left-right width of the left side frame portion: shown on the right side in FIG. 19A), that is, The frame width on the opening / closing axis side is set to be relatively large in order to increase the strength and support strength of the front frame 14 itself. In the state where the front frame 14 is closed, the frame width on the opening / closing axis side is set wide so that the left end portion of the outer rail 62 is covered and hidden by the frame portion on the left side of the front frame base 200. For this reason, the outer rail 62 is overlapped with the left side frame portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the game ball in front of the entrance of the game area. Here, since the player visually recognizes the game balls exhibiting various behaviors in the game area and enjoys the ball game, even if it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball before entering the game area, there is nothing in the actual game. There will be no hindrance. Therefore, sufficient strength and support strength of the front frame 14 can be ensured without hindering the game. Incidentally, the distance in the left-right direction between the left end position of the outer rail 62 and the left end position of the outer frame 12 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is about 30 mm, the right end position of the game area (the inner right end position of the arc member 70) and the outer frame. The distance in the left-right direction from the right end position of 12 is about 45 mm.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. As shown in FIG. 1, on the upper side of the window portion 14 c and on both the left and right sides thereof, electrical decoration portions 202 to 204 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 14 c. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 202 to 204 function as stage lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 202 to 204 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach stage. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a prize ball lamp 205 that is turned on while awarding a prize ball is provided in the upper right part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front. An error display lamp 206 that is turned on when an error occurs is provided. In addition, a small window 207 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 204 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side of the front frame base 200 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. A stamp or the like affixed to the affixing space K1 (see FIG. 3) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 208 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 202 to 204 in order to bring out more gorgeousness. For this chrome plating, trivalent chrome is used in consideration of the production environment and the like, instead of hexavalent chrome which has been widely used conventionally.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a lending operation unit 210 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 210 is provided with a frequency display unit 211, a ball lending button 212, and a return button 213. When the lending operation unit 210 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball according to the operation Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 211 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 212 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 201 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 213 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 210. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 210 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the upper right corner on the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 19A, an LED light emitting substrate 214 as a light emitting means is attached to the back surface of the front frame base 200 with screws. Further, various reinforcing members made of metal are provided on the back side of the front frame 14 so as to surround the window portion 14c. Specifically, metal reinforcing plates 221 to 224 are respectively attached to the back side of the front frame 14 and on the outer sides of the window portion 14c in the vertical and horizontal directions. These reinforcing plates 221 to 224 are connected in contact with each other to increase the rigidity and strength of the front frame 14 which has been reduced by the formation of the window portion 14c. Further, the right reinforcing plate 221 is disposed so as to overlap the rear surface side of the light emitting substrate 214 described above, but in order to avoid direct contact between them or to prevent the light emitting substrate 214 from being energized. A transparent synthetic resin cover plate 215 is provided between the reinforcing plate 221 and the light emitting substrate 214. Even if noise or a magnetic field is generated around the reinforcing plates 221 to 224 due to the charging, the influence on the light emitting substrate 214 is reduced by the cover plate 215, and malfunctions and failures are suppressed. . Part of the reinforcing plates 221 to 224 is grounded (not shown) so that the reinforcing plates 221 to 224 are difficult to be charged.

  The reinforcing plate 221 on the right side of the back surface of the front frame 14 is provided with an engaging claw 221a (see FIG. 2) having a hook shape at an intermediate position. The engaging claw 221a is configured to enter a groove 30j formed in the inner frame 13 (inner frame base 30) with the front frame 14 closed. As shown in FIG. 5, a metal stop plate 39 is screwed to the inner frame base 30 so as to cover a part of the groove 30 j, and the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13. In this state, the tip of the engaging claw 221a enters the back side of the retaining plate 39 shown in FIG. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being lifted at an intermediate position on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the upper plate 201 is provided on the front frame 14, and the front frame 14 is configured to be large in the vertical direction. Even if the (positions of the support brackets 33 and 34) are largely separated from each other, an illegal act with the front frame 14 floating can be suppressed.

  On the reinforcing plate 222 on the left side of the rear surface of the front frame 14, a pair of upper and lower front frame flange portions 14 a are formed integrally with the front frame 14. The front frame 14 is locked by engaging the front frame collar 14 a with the front frame collar 411 of the locking unit 410 provided on the back side of the inner frame 13. The front frame 14 in the locked state is unlocked by performing a predetermined unlocking operation with a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 420 and is in a state where it can be opened.

  A screw hole through which the screw 225 is inserted is provided in the central portion in the left-right direction of the reinforcing plate 223 on the upper back side of the front frame 14, and the tip of the screw 225 is, as shown in FIG. It is screwed to a plating member 208 provided on the front side of the front frame 14, and the plating member 208 is grounded through a screw 225 and a reinforcing plate 223. Therefore, even if the decorative plating is applied to the front side of the front frame 14, problems due to charging and noise caused by the charging can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a resin-made rail side wall member 226 is provided on the reinforcing plate 224 below the back surface of the front frame 14 at a position facing the firing rail 93. The rail side wall member 226 functions as a side wall of the launch rail 93 when the front frame 14 is closed so that the game ball does not spill from the launch rail 93. Further, on the right side of the rail side wall member 226, a ball passage rod 241 that protrudes from the back surface side of the front frame 14 so as to be continuous with the hole connected to the upper plate 201 is fixed to the front frame base 200 with a screw. When the front frame 14 is closed, the ball passage rod 241 pushes the shutter 37 (see FIG. 2) on the inner frame 13 side to form a game ball flow path to the upper plate 201.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, on the left side of the rail side wall member 226, as shown in FIG. An opening / closing unit 230 is provided on the upper side of the ball outlet 224a. The opening / closing unit 230 closes the ball outlet 224a when the front frame 14 is opened. The ball outlet 224a is provided in the most downstream portion of the upper plate 201, and communicates the upper plate 201 and the introduction port 102b (see FIG. 15) of the ball launch unit 90 when the front frame 14 is closed. The game ball placed on the upper plate 201 is guided to the introduction port 102b of the ball launch unit 90 via the ball outlet 224a.

  Here, the structure of the opening / closing unit 230 will be described with reference to FIG. The opening / closing unit 230 includes a housing 231 as a case member screwed to the lower reinforcing plate 224 and an upper end accommodated in the housing 231, and the other portions are arranged downward along the lower reinforcing plate 224. A thin plate-like shielding plate 232 that extends and a rotation lever 233 made of hard resin that is rotatably fixed to the upper surface of the shielding plate 232 while being pivotably supported on the inner surface of the housing 231. ing. The opening / closing unit 230 is integrated with the housing 231 by assembling the shielding plate 232 and the rotation lever 233, and the assembling work on the front frame 14 side is facilitated and simplified.

  The rotation lever 233 is pivotally supported by the housing 231 about a rotation shaft 231a provided on the inner surface of the housing 231 substantially parallel and substantially horizontally to the lower reinforcing plate 224. The rotation lever 233 includes a plate support portion 233a extending from the rotation shaft 231a toward the reinforcing plate 224 (left side in FIG. 20A), and extending downward from the rotation shaft 231a. In addition, a contact portion 233b that protrudes out of the housing 231 is provided so as to contact a part of the inner frame 13 when the front frame 14 is closed. The inner frame base 30 is provided with a protrusion 30k (see FIG. 5) that protrudes from the mounting surface 30f to the front surface, and the contact portion 233b is provided so as to contact the protrusion 30k. Since the contact portion 233b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the opening / closing direction of the front frame 14 (the left-right direction in FIG. 20A) with respect to the rotation shaft 231a, the contact portion is closed when the front frame 14 is closed. When the 233b is pressed by the inner frame 13, the rotation lever 233 is easy to rotate, and the operation over a long period of use is ensured.

  The shielding plate 232 is formed of an elastic thin plate-like metal piece (for example, a stainless steel thin plate), and one end is fixed to the plate support portion 233a (the end on the front frame 14 side) of the rotating lever 233, The lower end 232a which is the other end is a free end. The lower end 232a of the shielding plate 232 is formed wider than the ball outlet 224a, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the ball outlet 224a is reliably covered by the lower end portion 232a of the shielding plate 232 so that the elastic deformation in the middle portion of the shielding plate 232 is facilitated and the operation resistance is lowered, and the outflow of the game ball from the ball outlet 224a is prevented. The shielding plate 232 can surely prevent it. Note that the width of the lower end 232a may be narrower than the ball outlet 224a. However, it is preferable that the lower end 232a has a width equal to or larger than the same in order to prevent an erroneous outflow of the game ball. It is preferable to widen the width of 232a.

  If the lower end 232a of the shielding plate 232 is narrower than the ball outlet 224a, the shielding plate 232 enters the ball outlet 224a, the lower end of the shielding plate 232 collides with the game ball in the ball outlet 224a, and the shielding plate 232 is deformed. And damage is likely to occur. In the pachinko machine 10, since the lower end portion 232a of the shielding plate 232 is wider than the ball outlet 224a, the shielding plate 232 does not enter the ball outlet 224a, and the shielding plate 232 is brought into contact with the game ball. Deformation and damage are prevented.

  Here, on the lower side of the ball outlet 224a, as shown in FIG. 20A, a passage leading from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 301 and a closing plate 234 for closing the passage are provided. 234 is movable to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (left side of FIG. 20A). When the closing plate 234 moves to the front side, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 301 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down to the lower plate 301. In this case, if the lower end portion 232a of the shielding plate 232 is narrower than the bulb outlet 224a, the lower end portion 232a may enter the bulb outlet 224a to cause clogging. By forming the lower end 232a of the shielding plate 232 wider than the ball outlet 224a, the communication between the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 301 can be ensured, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  The shielding plate 232 of the opening / closing unit 230 is supported by the reinforcing plate 224 and the plate support portion 233a of the rotating lever 233 in a state in which a flat thin plate is elastically deformed and bent downward. For this reason, the shielding plate 232 is in a state of pressing the reinforcing plate 224 so as to return to the original flat state by the elastic force. When the front frame 14f is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 20A), the ball outlet 224a is closed while being pressed by the shielding plate 232, and the game ball is prevented from flowing out.

  When the front frame 14f is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 20A, the front end side (lower end side) of the contact portion 233b of the rotating lever 233 faces the back side of the front frame 14 (right side in FIG. 20A). Projecting. In this state, the rotating lever 233 has a direction in which the contact portion 233b protrudes to the back side of the front frame 14 with the rotating shaft 231a as a center (FIG. 20 (FIG. 20). a) (counterclockwise direction), and stops at a position (first rotation position) in contact with a part of the housing 231 (stopper portion 231b).

  In the state where the rotation lever 233 is disposed at the first rotation position, the shielding plate 232 is in a state where it is suspended to a position where the lower end portion 232a closes the upper portion of the bulb outlet 224a. In this state, the flow of the game balls in the upper plate 201 is restricted by the shielding plate 232, and the game balls do not flow out from the ball outlet 224 a to the back side of the front frame 14. Therefore, even if the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be prevented from flowing out by the shielding plate 232.

  Further, the housing 231 is provided with a pressing portion 231c that abuts against a portion between one end portion and the lower end portion 232a of the shielding plate 232 supported by the rotating lever 233 and presses the shielding plate 232 in the direction of the reinforcing plate 224. It has been. For this reason, the shielding plate 232 is more strongly pressed toward the reinforcing plate 224, so that the game ball is led to the ball outlet 224a vigorously, or there are a lot of game balls in the upper plate 201 so that the shielding plate 232 is opened. Even when the force increases, the game ball is more reliably received and the outflow of the game ball from the ball outlet 224a is surely prevented.

  When the front frame 14 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 20A, the contact portion 233b of the rotating lever 233 is pressed while contacting the protrusion 30k of the inner frame 13, as shown in FIG. To the front frame 14 side. Thereafter, as the front frame 14 is closed, the pivot lever 233 pivots in the direction entering the housing 231 from the first pivot position shown in FIG. 20A (clockwise direction in FIG. 20B). When the front frame 14 is completely closed (that is, the front frame collar portion 14a is engaged with the front frame collar member 412 of the locking unit 410), the position is pushed into the housing 231 to the maximum (second position). ). As the rotation lever 233 rotates, the plate support portion 233a of the rotation lever 233 moves to the side (upper side) away from the ball outlet 224a.

  In a state in which the rotation lever 233 is disposed at the second rotation position, the shielding plate 232 is further distorted along the plate surface of the reinforcement plate 224 while being further distorted by the rise of the plate support portion 233a of the rotation lever 233. Slide upward. The lower end 232a of the shielding plate 232 that has covered the ball outlet 224a rises to a position where the game ball can pass through the ball outlet 224a. If there is a game ball in the upper plate 201, the game ball will sequentially flow out from the ball outlet 224a toward the introduction port 102b of the ball launch unit 90. Therefore, as long as game balls are continuously supplied to the upper plate 201, the game balls can be continuously fired toward the game area by the ball launch unit 90.

  When the front frame 14 is released from the closed state, the rotation lever 233 (contact portion 233b) is released from the pressing by the protrusion 30k of the inner frame 13, and is restored from the second rotation position by the restoring force of the shielding plate 232. Displacement to the 1 rotational position. The shielding plate 232 descends while sliding on the plate surface of the reinforcing plate 224 in accordance with the displacement of the rotation lever 233, the ball outlet 224a is closed at the lower end 232a of the shielding plate 232, and the game ball from the ball outlet 224a. Spillage is prevented. That is, since the ball outlet 224a is closed with the opening of the front frame 14, the store clerk at the game hall is worried about the outflow of the game ball in the upper plate 201 when the front frame 14 is opened and an operation such as inspection is performed. The front frame 14 can be easily opened without any problems.

  Next, the glass unit 17 attached to the back surface of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front view of the glass unit 17. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Sa-Sa in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Sb-Sb in FIG. 21, and FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Sc-Sc in FIG. It is. FIG. 25 is a partially enlarged view of the glass unit 17 as seen from the direction of the arrow V in FIG.

  The glass unit 17 in the present embodiment is not formed by attaching rectangular plate glasses to the front frame separately in front and rear pairs as in the prior art, but as a whole, two plate glasses 151 having a round shape are integrated (assembled). And then attached to the front frame 14. The glass unit 17 substantially corresponds to the shape of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14 and is provided so as to surround a pair of front and rear plate glasses 151 that are substantially circular and have the same shape, and the periphery of the plate glasses 151. The holding frame 153 is provided.

  The holding frame 153 is made of ABS resin, and is formed in an annular shape along the outer shape of the plate glass 151 with a cross-sectional shape of “H” as shown in FIG. For this reason, on both sides of the holding frame 153 (upper and lower sides in FIG. 22), a holding portion for the plate glass 151 formed in a pair of bowl-shaped cross sections is formed. The outer peripheral edge on the one surface side is disposed in contact with the holding frame 153. The holding frame 153 and the plate glass 151 are respectively bonded and fixed by an adhesive (bonded with a hot-melt adhesive or the like), and the two plate glasses 151 are integrated with a predetermined interval by a holding frame 153 interposed therebetween. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the holding frame 153 is formed in a shape bulging outward on one side (lower left side in FIG. 21), and a part of the plate glass 151 is also swelled so as to cover the bulging portion. The shape is out. This bulging portion serves as a cover that covers a part of the guide rail formed by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 on the surface of the game board 16 (the lower left portion in FIG. 3), and the front surface of the game board 16 in the guide rail portion. The outflow of game balls to the side is regulated.

  In addition, the holding frame 153 is provided with a partition wall 153a that divides an area between the two glass sheets 151 in a portion that bulges outward on one side (lower left side in FIG. 21). A storage portion 154 is formed between the two plate glasses 151 by the partition wall 153a, and a drying tool 155 that absorbs moisture is provided in the storage portion 154 in order to prevent moisture condensation and fogging. The drying tool 155 is composed of a casing that forms a housing space inside with a pair of two case members facing each other, and a desiccant on the grains housed in the casing. The casing is partitioned into a plurality of rooms by partition walls (not shown), and a desiccant is accommodated in each room. Examples of the desiccant include zeolite and silica gel. The casing is formed with a large number of small holes communicating with the inside and outside of the casing, and the air in the space sealed or almost sealed by the two glass sheets 151 is efficiently dehumidified to prevent the occurrence of condensation. It has become so. The partition wall 153a and the drying tool 155 of the holding frame 153 are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the opening formed by the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, and the drying tool 155 and the like unnecessary for decoration of the pachinko machine 10 are externally provided. Is not visible.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the holding frame 153 is provided with an escape hole 153b that communicates the internal space surrounded by the two plate glasses 151 and the holding frame 153 with the outside. This escape hole 153b is provided in order to make the bonding and fixing of the plate glass 151 easy and reliable. Adhesive is injected into the entrance of the escape hole 153b, dried and hardened. Further, the inner surface shape of the escape hole 153b is formed in a tapered shape (conical shape) in which the inner diameter gradually decreases from the outside (the lower side in FIG. 21) to the inside, and when the adhesive is injected from the outside. The escape hole 153b is easily blocked.

  Here, the assembling process of the glass unit 17 will be described with a focus on the portion where the two glass plates 151 are bonded and fixed to the holding frame 153 in particular. One plate glass 151 is placed, and the holding frame 153 is bonded and fixed to the plate glass 151. Next, after the drying tool 155 is set in the housing portion 154, the second sheet glass 151 is bonded and fixed to the holding frame 153.

  The second sheet glass 151 is pressed with a strong force in order to make the bonding more reliable. However, the air between the two sheet glasses 151 may be compressed during the pressing. If the air is strongly compressed, there is a concern that the plate glass 151 may be peeled off from the holding frame 153 after bonding due to the expansion of the air. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since air can enter and exit between the glass plates 151 and the outside through the escape holes 153b, the air is compressed even if the second glass plate 151 is pressed during adhesion fixing. Thus, a situation in which the plate glass 151 peels from the holding frame 153 due to the expansion of air does not occur.

  After the two plate glasses 151 are bonded to the holding frame 153, an adhesive is injected into the escape hole 153b and dried and cured after a certain time. As a result, a sealed space is formed between the glass plates 151, restricting the entry of moisture, dust, and the like, and improving the moisture absorption effect by the drying tool 155 to improve the visibility of the game area. it can.

  The holding frame 153 is provided with mounting portions 153c that protrude outward at a plurality of locations on the periphery thereof. Each attachment portion 153c is formed in the same shape, and each attachment portion 153c is provided with an insertion hole 153d along the surface direction of the plate glass 151, as shown in FIG. Further, a metal plate 161 as a thin washer having a small-diameter hole 161a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 153d is held on one surface (the upper surface in FIG. 24) of the attachment portion 153c by a small screw 162. It is fixed to the frame 153. Further, an attachment screw 163 for attaching the glass unit 17 to the front frame 14 is provided so as to be inserted into the insertion hole 153d and the small diameter hole 161a of the metal plate 161.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the mounting screw 163 includes a shaft portion 163a formed in a cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, a male screw portion 163b integrally formed on the distal end side of the shaft portion 163a, and a proximal end side of the shaft portion 163a. It is formed by the operation part 163c provided in this. The shaft portion 163a is formed to have a smaller diameter than the small diameter hole 161a of the metal plate 161, while the operation portion 163c is formed to be larger. The male screw portion 163b has substantially the same outer diameter as the small-diameter hole 161a of the metal plate 161, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the small-diameter hole 161a and a smaller valley diameter. For this reason, the mounting screw 163 can be mounted by screwing the male screw portion 163b into the small diameter hole 161a of the metal plate 161, and can be moved through the length of the shaft portion 163a (stroke amount) through the metal plate 161. Thus, the holding frame 153 cannot be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the operation portion 163c of the mounting screw 163 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter larger than that of the shaft portion 163a, and its outer peripheral surface is processed to be jagged by a fine groove 163c2 along the axial direction. In addition, a cross-shaped groove 163c1 is provided at the center of the end surface of the operation portion 163c, and the mounting screw 163 can be rotated by a tool such as a Phillips screwdriver. For this reason, even if the outer peripheral surface of the operation part 163c is pinched with a fingertip, even if a predetermined tool is inserted into the cross-shaped groove 163c1, the attaching screw 163 can be rotated. Therefore, the attachment / detachment operation of the glass unit 17 can be performed without a tool, and can be performed more easily and reliably when there is a tool. The mounting screw 163 is configured to be screwed into the metal plate 161 so that it cannot be removed from the holding frame 153. However, the mounting screw 163 has a small-diameter hole 161a of the metal plate 161 larger than the outer diameter of the male screw portion 163b. May be easily removable. Further, a locking washer such as a spring washer may be provided between the mounting screw 163 (operation unit 163c) and the metal plate 162. Further, the outer diameter shape of the operation portion 163c is not limited to the above-described shape, and may be formed so as to be easily rotated by hand, for example, a so-called thumb screw having portions protruding in a plate shape on both sides of the shaft. good.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 19A, there are provided attachments 227 in which female screws are formed at a plurality of locations corresponding to the attachment portions 153 c provided on the glass unit 17. The fixture 227 is a metal member that is formed in a boss (cylindrical) shape and has an internal thread on which an attachment screw 163 can be screwed, and is screwed or press-fitted into a predetermined position of the front frame base 200. Each is fixed. The glass unit 17 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the front frame 14 by fixing the attachment portions 153 c to the attachments 227 by the attachment screws 163.

  Further, on the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 2, three ribs 200 a to 200 c protruding to the back side along a part of the outer peripheral shape of the holding frame 153 are integrally formed with the front frame base 200. Has been. The lower ribs 200b and 200c are provided so as to protrude larger than the upper rib 200a at the two lower portions of the window portion 14c of the front frame base 200. To assist. The upper rib 200a and the lower rib 200c are integrally formed with a locking projection that protrudes toward the center of the window portion 14c at the leading end of each rib in the protruding direction. At the time of attachment, the glass projection 17 can be temporarily fixed by fitting the engaging protrusion into a recess provided on the outer peripheral edge of the holding frame 153.

  Next, returning to FIG. 19A, the configuration of the front frame 14 will be described. Support metal fittings 228 and 229 are attached to two upper and lower portions as a support mechanism of the inner frame 13 on the right side end portion of the rear surface of the front frame 14 (left end portion in front view of the pachinko machine 10). The front frame 14 is releasably attached to the inner frame 13 by assembling the support brackets 228 and 229 on the front frame 14 side to the support brackets 33 and 34 (see FIG. 5) on the inner frame 13 side.

  More specifically, the support bracket 228 on the upper side of the front frame 14 has a substantially rod shape, and is formed in a stepped columnar shape whose upper diameter is thicker than the lower diameter. As described above, the support bracket 33 on the upper side of the inner frame 13 is provided with the support hole 33a having a notch opened on the front side of the inner frame 13, and the width of the notch of the support hole 33a is set to the front frame. 14 is narrower than the upper diameter of the upper support fitting 228 and wider than the lower diameter. For this reason, if the lower part (small diameter part) of the upper support metal fitting 228 is fitted in the support hole 33a and then the support metal fitting 228 is slid downward, the large diameter part of the support metal fitting 228 is fitted in the support hole 33a. The support fitting 228 cannot be removed from the support hole 33a.

  The lower support bracket 229 on the lower side of the front frame 14 is fixed to the back side of the front frame 14 with screws, and is bent from the back side to the lower end surface. The support fitting 229 is provided with a support hole 229a that opens upward on the lower end surface of the front frame 14, and the support hole 229a has a protruding shaft formed by the support fitting 34 on the inner frame 13 side. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13.

  As a procedure for mounting the front frame 14 to the inner frame 13, first, the lower portion (small diameter portion) of the support fitting 228 on the upper side of the front frame 14 is inserted into the support hole 33a through the notch. Next, the front frame 14 is slid downward after the support hole 229a on the lower side of the front frame 14 is positioned on the protruding shaft 34a of the support fitting 34 on the lower side of the inner frame 13. The support metal 228 on the upper side of the front frame 14 has a large-diameter portion fitted into the support hole 33a and cannot be removed. Installation is complete.

  Next, the lower plate unit 15 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a front view of the lower plate unit 15, and FIG. 27 is a rear view thereof. The lower plate unit 15 is obtained by attaching a lower plate 301, an operation handle 310, and the like to an ABS resin lower plate base 300 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the lower tray unit 15 is provided with a lower tray 301 as a ball receiving tray at a substantially central portion, and is discharged from the lower tray outlet 36a (see FIG. 2) on the inner frame 13 side through the outlet 301a. The played game balls are configured to be stored in the lower plate 301. The lower plate 301 is formed by sticking a flame retardant ABS resin formed as a separate component to the lower plate base 300 to the surface. Although it is not necessary to form all of the lower plate 301 with flame-retardant ABS resin, at least the surface portion of the lower plate 301, that is, the surface layer of the lower plate 301 and the front panel 302 at the back of the lower plate 301 are made of ABS resin. It is preferable to form. Since there is a risk that the lit cigarette will be left on the lower plate 301, it is possible to prevent damage to the pachinko machine 10 and the occurrence of fire by forming at least its surface portion with flame retardant ABS resin. It is. The front panel 302 is provided with a number of speaker holes 303 for outputting sound from the speaker SP. It is fixed by.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 301, a ball removal lever 304 is provided for operating when the game balls stored in the lower plate 301 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 304 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 301 is opened. A game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball pulling lever 304 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand boxes”) for receiving game balls discharged from the lower plate 301 is placed below the lower plate 301.

  As described above, the operation handle 310 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 301, and the ashtray 305 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 301. The ashtray 305 is configured to be rotatable in the front and back directions together with a shaft that is rotatably attached to the lower tray base 300. A metal plate 306 is provided on the back surface side of the lower plate unit 15 so as to cover the entire back surface, and the rigidity and strength of the lower plate unit 15 itself are enhanced.

  The lower pan unit 15 is attached to the inner frame 13 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 13 and the front frame 14, the lower pan unit 15 can be opened to the front side with the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. Yes. The lower dish unit 15 is provided with a support hole 307 on the upper left side of the front view and a support shaft 308 on the lower left side of the front view. When the support hole 307 and the support shaft 308 of the lower plate unit 15 are assembled to the support brackets 34 and 35 (see FIG. 5) on the inner frame 13 side, the lower plate unit 15 is attached to the inner frame 13 so that it can be opened and closed. Is done.

  The support hole 307 and the support shaft 308 will be described in more detail. The support hole 307 is configured by a hole drilled in a portion where the upper end portion of the sheet metal 306 is folded back, and protrudes downward in the support bracket 34 on the inner frame 13 side. The protruding shaft 34b to be inserted can be inserted. The support shaft 307 is composed of a substantially inverted L-shaped projection that can be projected and retracted in the vertical direction, and is always maintained in a state of projecting downward by a spring (not shown) covered by the sheet metal 306.

  As a mounting procedure of the lower plate unit 15, first, the protruding shaft 34 b on the inner frame 13 side is inserted into the support hole 307 to fix the upper side of the lower plate unit 15 to the inner frame 13. Thereafter, the support shaft 308 is brought into an immersive state against the biasing force of the spring, and then the tip of the support shaft 308 is aligned with the support hole of the support fitting 35 provided on the lower side of the inner frame 13. When the positions of the support shaft 308 and the support hole match, the support shaft 308 is fitted into the support hole by the biasing force of the spring, and the mounting of the lower dish unit 15 is completed.

  The sheet metal 306 of the lower dish unit 15 is formed with a lower dish engaging portion 15a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and arranged in two upper and lower portions on the left side of the back surface. The lower plate unit 15 is locked by engaging the lower plate engaging portion 15 a with the lower plate hook member 413 of the locking unit 410 provided on the back side of the inner frame 13. The lower plate unit 15 in the locked state is unlocked by performing a predetermined unlocking operation with the dedicated key on the cylinder lock 420 and is in a state where it can be opened.

  Here, the lower plate 301 and the operation handle 310 of the pachinko machine 10 in which the lower plate unit 15 is arranged are conventionally formed as a part of the inner frame 13 and cannot be opened to the front side. 14 is configured so as to cover the front side of the inner frame 13 up to the lower end portion of the upper plate 201 formed by 14. On the front side of the inner frame 13 covered with the front frame 14, a game board 16 that forms a game area and a ball launch unit 90 that launches a game ball toward the game area are arranged side by side, When only the front frame 14 is opened forward and the lower plate 301 and the operation handle 310 are not opened, the arrangement position of the ball launching unit 90 is limited to the lower end portion of the upper plate 201, and the game is formed on the upper side. It was difficult to enlarge the area.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the lower plate unit 15 is configured to be openable to the inner frame 13 in addition to the front frame 14, the ball launch unit 90 is placed on the back side of the lower plate 301 and the operation handle 310. It can be arranged on the lower side so as to overlap, and the game area of the game board 16 can be made larger in the vertical direction accordingly. Moreover, since the lower plate unit 15 can be opened, in addition to the back surface side at the lower end portion of the inner frame 13, various types are provided on each surface of the lower surface portion of the lower plate unit 15 and the front surface side of the inner frame 13 at the lower end portion. Components and wiring can be accommodated, and the degree of freedom in designing the components and wiring is increased. Further, when working on the lower side of the lower plate 301 or the operation handle 310, for example, when the ball clogging in the passage connecting the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 301 is eliminated, or the rear side of the lower plate 301 is positioned. In the case of checking a full tank sensor for detecting a full tank state, the lower tray unit 15 is opened, and the inner frame 13 is fixed to the outer frame 12 so that each of the inner frames 13 can be viewed from the front side. Work can be done. When the inner frame 13 is opened, it is difficult to work because the inner frame 13 swings with respect to the outer frame 12, but the work performed on the inner frame 13 by opening the lower tray unit 15 is fixed by the inner frame 13. It is simple because it can be done in the state that has been done.

  Further, the inner frame 13, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are formed by assembling other members to the respective members (the inner frame base 30, the front frame base 200, and the lower plate base 300) as a base. In the present embodiment, the base members 30, 200, 300 are all made of synthetic resin, specifically, ABS resin. By forming each of these base members 30, 200, and 300 with a synthetic resin, it is possible to cope with a more complicated shape by forming the base member with metal, and decorations are formed by forming characters, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. While improving the performance, an attachment part or the like of the mating part is integrally formed on the back surface side to reduce the production cost. In addition, the ABS resin is generally inexpensive and has a good paste such as plating and is excellent in decorativeness. Therefore, it is easy to form a decoration subjected to surface treatment at a low cost on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the ABS resin has an advantage of high impact resistance, so that the player falls down and collides with the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, or a player who is dissatisfied with the game result strikes the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. Even so, the ABS resin is suitable as a material for the base members 30, 200, and 300 because the resin is less likely to be damaged and the player is injured.

  The base members 30, 200, 300 and the decorative plate 24 of the outer frame 13 are all formed of ABS resin, which is the same material. For this reason, when at least two members of the base members 30, 200, 300 and the decorative plate 24 are formed in the same color, the degree of fading or discoloration becomes the same due to deterioration over time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in chromaticity of the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 constituted by a plurality of members over a long period of time and maintain a good quality appearance. In particular, it is preferable that the base members 30, 200, 300 and the decorative plate 24 of the outer frame 13 are made of the same material up to the manufacturer and material grade in order to maintain a good quality appearance.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of a control board unit and a back pack unit on the back of the pachinko machine 10. 30 is a rear view showing a state in which the game board 16 is assembled to the inner frame 13, FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the inner frame 13 viewed from the rear, and FIG. 32 is a perspective view of the game board 16 viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the support fitting 535.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged side by side in the vertical and horizontal directions, and are stacked one after the other. A protective cover is attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are separately mounted on two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually mounted on the inner frame 13 or the back surface of the game board 16. In this case, the main board and the sound lamp control board are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the dispensing control board and the power supply board are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit is referred to as a “first control board unit 501”, and the latter unit is referred to as a “second control board unit 502”. Further, the back pack 651 and the dispensing unit 652 forming the protective cover part are also integrated as one unit, and this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 503” here. The detailed configuration of each unit 501 to 503 will be described later.

  The first control board unit 501, the second control board unit 502, and the back pack unit 503 are configured to be detachable without using any tools or the like in units of units. It is configured to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 13 or the back surface of the game board 16. This is also a device for making it possible to easily check a hidden configuration or the like even if the units 501 to 503 and other configurations are arranged one behind the other.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the units 501 to 503 are arranged side by side and attached. The first control board unit 501 is substantially L-shaped, and is arranged at the approximate center of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 502 is arranged below the first control board unit 501. Further, the back pack unit 503 is disposed in a region partially overlapping the upper portion of the first control board unit 501.

  The first control board unit 501 is provided with a support shaft part M1 at the left end as viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the first control board unit 501 can be opened and closed around the axis A of the support shaft part M1. It has become. Further, the first control board unit 501 is provided with a fastening portion M2 made of a ny latch or the like at the right end portion thereof (that is, on the opposite side of the support shaft portion M1, more specifically, at the open end side), and a locking claw portion at the upper end portion. M3 is provided, and the first control board unit 501 is fixedly held on the main body of the pachinko machine 10 (the back surface of the game board 16) by the support shaft part M1, the fastening part M2, and the locking claw part M3.

  The second control board unit 502 is provided with a support shaft part M4 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 502 can be opened and closed around the axis B of the support shaft part M4. It has become. Further, the second control board unit 502 is provided with a fastening portion M5 made of a ny latch or the like at the left end portion thereof (that is, the opposite side of the support shaft portion M4, more specifically, the open end side), and this support shaft portion M4. The second control board unit 502 is fixed and held on the main body of the pachinko machine 10 (the back surface of the inner frame 13) by the fastening portion M5.

  The back pack unit 503 is provided with a support shaft portion M6 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 503 can be opened and closed around an axis C by the support shaft portion M6. Further, the back pack unit 503 is provided with a fastening portion M7 made of a ny latch or the like at the left end portion thereof (that is, on the opposite side of the support shaft portion M6, more specifically, at the open end side), and rotates at the upper end portion and the lower end portion, respectively. Locking parts M8 and M9 are provided, and the back pack unit 503 is fixed to the main body of the pachinko machine 10 (the back surface of the inner frame 13) by the support shaft part M6, the fastening part M7 and the locking parts M8 and M9. Retained.

  The development directions of the units 501 to 503 are not the same, and the first control board unit 501 is left-opened when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, whereas the second control board unit 502 and the back pack unit 503 are It is configured to open on the right.

  Here, the back surface structure of the inner frame 13 and the game board 16 is demonstrated using FIGS. 30-33. As shown in FIG. 30, the game board 16 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the inner frame base 30, and includes three locking fixtures 511 provided on the left and right sides of the inner frame 13, It is fixed so as not to drop off by a total of four locking fixtures 511 and 512 with a resin-made locking fixture 512 provided substantially at the lower center of the frame 13. The locking fixtures 511 and 512 can be manually rotated, and can be switched between a fixed position (lock position) and a fixed release position (unlock position). FIG. 30 shows a state in which the locking fixtures 511 and 512 are in the locked position. The locking fixtures 511 at the three left and right sides of the game board 16 are configured by L-shaped metal fittings formed by bending metal pieces, and are configured so as not to protrude outward from the inner frame 13 in a state where the game board 16 is fixed. ing. The locking fixture 512 at one lower portion of the game board 16 is formed of a resin I-type fastener.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the game board 16. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a frame cover 513 made of resin (for example, made of ABS) that covers the center frame 86 (see FIG. 3) from behind, and is provided at the rear end of the frame cover 513. The first symbol display device 81 as a liquid crystal display device and the display control device 505 are detachably attached in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In the frame cover 513, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 86 are disposed.

  A back frame set 515 is attached to the back surface of the game board 16 so as to surround the variable display device unit 80. The back frame set 515 is a thin resin-molded product (for example, made of ABS) provided so as to stick to the back surface of the game board 16, and a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning openings. Is formed. Specifically, below the back frame set 515, the above-described general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, and the discharge opening for discharging the winning balls to the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 3) to the back side of the game board 16. And a collection passage 516 that gathers at one location on the downstream side is formed. A discharge passage board 517 made of resin (for example, made of polycarbonate resin) is attached below the game board 16, and the discharge passage board 517 is used to guide the discharge ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A discharge passage 518 is formed. Therefore, as illustrated by the phantom line in FIG. 30, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 63 and the like are gathered through the collection passage 516 of the back frame set 515, and further, the discharge passage 518 of the discharge passage board 517 is formed. Through the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the out port 66 (see FIG. 3) similarly leads to the discharge passage 518, and the game balls that have not won any winning opening are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage 518.

  In the above configuration, with the lower end surface of the game board 16 as a boundary, a back frame set 515 (collection passage 516) is provided on the upper side, and a discharge passage board 517 (discharge passage 518) is provided on the lower side. The game board 16 is provided without overlapping (overlapping) in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the game board 16 is removed from the inner frame 13, there is no inconvenience that the discharge passage board 517 prevents the game board 16 from being removed.

  Since the discharge passage board 517 is provided just behind the upper plate 201 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, a wire or the like is inserted from the ball discharge port (the upper plate discharge port 36b in FIG. 2) leading to the upper plate 201. Furthermore, an illegal act of causing the wire or the like to enter the game area side through a gap between the inner frame 13 and the discharge passage board 517 can be considered. Therefore, the discharge passage board 517 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plate 519 extending in front of the pachinko machine 10 so as to almost integrally overlap the inner frame 13 around the back side of the upper plate 201. Therefore, even if a wire or the like tries to enter from the gap between the inner frame 13 and the discharge passage board 517, the wire or the like is obstructed by the plate 519, and it is very difficult to make the wire or the like enter the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as forcibly opening the variable winning device 65 (large opening) with a wire or the like.

  In addition, on the back surface of the game board 16, a winning detection mechanism for detecting the entrance (passing) of a game ball to various winning openings is provided. Specifically, a prize opening switch 521 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize opening 63 on the front side of the game board 16, and a specific area switch 522 and a count switch 523 are provided in the variable prize winning device 65. The specific area switch 522 is a switch for determining that a game ball won in the variable winning device 65 in the big hit state has entered a specific area (an area for determining whether to continue the big hit state), and the count switch 523 It is a switch that counts. A first entrance switch 524 is provided at a position corresponding to the first entrance 64 and a second entrance switch 525 is provided at a position corresponding to the second entrance 67.

  The prize opening switch 521 and the second ball opening switch 525 are connected to the board relay board 526 via electric wiring (including a cable connector) (not shown), and the board relay board 526 is a main board (main control device) to be described later. 561) via electrical wiring. Further, the specific area switch 522 and the count switch 523 are connected to the large opening relay board 527 through electric wiring, and the large opening relay board 527 is connected to the main board through electric wiring. On the other hand, the first entrance switch 524 is directly connected to the main board without going through the relay board.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 65 includes a large opening solenoid 581 (see FIG. 47) for opening a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a winning for guiding a winning ball to a specific area. A ball sorting plate solenoid is provided, and the first entrance 64 is provided with a first entrance solenoid for opening the electric accessory. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the solenoid 92 is employ | adopted as a launching device which launches a game ball, the launching device is collectively arranged on the front side of the inner frame 13. For this reason, compared with the conventional combination of a motor and a launcher, a launching device is not arranged on the back side of the inner frame 13, and the space on the back side of the inner frame 13 is effectively used as a space for other parts such as a control board. Can do.

  The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main board, which will be described later, and a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation is sent from the main board to the payout control board. The Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board. In such a case, a conventional method (so-called evidence ball method) in which game balls won at various winning openings are once collected in a winning ball processing device, and the winning ball processing device confirms the presence of the winning balls one by one and then pays out one by one. Unlike the above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment electrically senses the winning of the game ball for each of the winning holes, and pays out immediately (that is, the pachinko machine 10 abolishes the winning ball processing device). is doing). Therefore, even if there are a lot of game balls to be paid out, the payout can be carried out quickly.

  An attachment mechanism for attaching the first control board unit 501 is provided in the back frame set 515 fixed to the back surface of the game board 16 with screws. Specifically, as the attachment mechanism, a support fitting 531 extending in the vertical direction is attached to the lower left corner of the back surface of the game board 16 with a screw, and the support fitting 531 has a pair of upper and lower support holes 531a on the same axis. Is formed. In addition, a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (ny latch holes) 532 are provided in the lower right portion of the back of the game board 16 (see FIG. 30), and a locking claw piece 533 is provided in the upper left portion.

  An attachment mechanism for attaching the second control board unit 502 and the back pack unit 503 is provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, a long support metal fitting 535 shown in FIG. 33 is attached to the rear right end portion of the inner frame 13.

  The support metal fitting 535 has a long plate-like metal fitting body 536, and support holes 537 for the second control board unit 502 are formed at two lower positions so as to stand up from the metal fitting body 536, and Support hole portions 538 for the back pack unit 503 are formed at two upper positions. Coaxial support holes are formed in the support hole portions 537 and 538, respectively. In addition, as an attachment mechanism for the second control board unit 502, as shown in FIG. 30, the inner frame 13 has a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (nai latch holes) 539 at the lower left end portion from the installation area of the game board 16. Is provided. In addition, as an attachment mechanism for the back pack unit 503, the inner frame 13 is provided with a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (ny latch holes) 540 at the left end portion of the game board 16 installation area. It should be noted that the support bracket for the second control board unit 502 and the support bracket for the back pack unit 503 can be provided as separate members. Further, as a mounting mechanism for the back pack unit 503, three rotary fixing tools 541 to 543 are provided on the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 503 is provided between the fixing tools 541 to 543 and the game board 16. Is supported by being sandwiched.

  In addition, in the lower right part of the game board 16 on the back side of the inner frame 13, as shown in FIG. 31, game balls to be paid out from a payout unit 652 to be described later are either the upper plate 201, the lower plate 301 or the discharge passage 518. A game ball distribution unit 545 is provided for distributing the game balls. The game ball distribution unit 545 is provided with three openings side by side, the left opening 545a communicates with the upper plate 201, the central opening 545b communicates with the lower plate 301, and the right opening 545c includes It is configured to communicate with the discharge passage 518.

  At the lower end of the inner frame 13, a large number of speaker holes 546 are formed as a part of the inner frame base 300 at a position overlapping the back side of the speaker SP attached to the lower dish unit 15. Even if the diaphragm (cone) vibrates during the sound output of the speaker SP, the vibration is released to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through the speaker hole 546, so that a resonance sound is generated between the inner frame 13 and the lower dish unit 15. Is suppressed. Note that the area of the opening formed by the speaker hole 546 is preferably equal to or larger than the area of the diaphragm of the speaker SP in the region overlapping the back surface side of the speaker SP in order to suppress the resonance, and the resonance is suppressed. However, in order to increase the rigidity and strength, it is preferable that the opening area of the speaker hole 546 and the area of the diaphragm of the speaker SP be the same or substantially the same.

  Next, the first control board unit 501 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a front view of the first control board unit 501, FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the unit 501, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 501, and FIG. FIG.

  The first control board unit 501 has a mounting base 551 having a substantially L shape, and the main control device 561 and the sound lamp control device 562 are mounted on the mounting base 551. Here, the main control unit 561 is an MPU 701 (see FIG. 47) as a one-chip microcomputer that manages the main control of the game, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a time count, It has a main board including a clock pulse generation circuit used for synchronization, etc., and this main board is housed in a board box 563 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. . The substrate box 563 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit 564 (sealing means) so that they cannot be opened, and the substrate box 563 is thereby sealed.

  As long as the sealing unit 564 is configured to connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be unsealed, any configuration can be applied. Here, as shown in FIG. 35 and the like, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of the sealing member. Sealing processing by the sealing unit 564 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the opening / sealing process again even after the operation. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit 564. When the substrate box 563 is opened due to a failure of the accommodated main substrate, the connection between the sealing member into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing member is cut. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the substrate box 563 is left in the substrate box 563, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 563.

  The audio lamp control device 562 includes an audio lamp control board including an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls voice and lamp display in accordance with an instruction from the main control device 561 or the display control device 505, and various ports, for example. The sound lamp control board is housed in a board box 565 made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power relay board 566 is mounted on the sound lamp control device 562, and power supplied from a power board described later is output to the display control device 505 and the sound lamp control device 562 via the power relay board 566. .

  The mounting base 551 is formed of a colored (for example, green, blue, etc.) resin material (for example, made of polycarbonate resin), and has two substrate mounting surfaces 552 and 553 that are flat on the surface. These substrate mounting surfaces 552 and 553 extend in a direction orthogonal to each other, and are formed with a step in the front-rear direction. However, the mounting base 551 may be a colorless transparent or translucent resin molded product.

  On one board mounting surface 552, the main control device 561 is arranged in a landscape orientation, and on the other board mounting surface 553, an audio lamp control device 562 (audio lamp control board) is oriented in a portrait orientation. Be placed. In particular, the main control device 561 is disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the rear, and the sound lamp control device 562 is disposed on the back side thereof. In this case, since the substrate mounting surfaces 552 and 553 are formed with steps in the front-rear direction, the control devices 561 and 562 are mounted in a state where the main controller 561 and the sound lamp controller 562 are mounted on the substrate mounting surfaces 552 and 553. Are arranged with a part of them stacked one after the other. That is, as can be seen in FIG. 35 and the like, the main controller 561 is arranged in a state where a part of the main controller 561 (about 1/3 on the left side in FIG. 26 in this embodiment) is floated. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 562 can be expanded to an area overlapping with the main control device 561, it is possible to cope with an increase in the size of the control board, and each control device can be installed efficiently. Further, when the first control board unit 501 is mounted on the game board 16, a space is secured behind the board mounting surface 552 so that the variable winning device 65 and its electric wiring can be installed without difficulty.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the board mounting surface 552 for the main board is formed with horizontally long through holes 554 at two places on the left and right. Correspondingly, the substrate box 563 of the main control device 561 is provided with rotational fixing tools 567 at two positions on the left and right sides of the back surface thereof. When the main controller 561 is mounted on the board mounting surface 552, the fixing tool 567 is passed through the through hole 554 of the board mounting surface 552, and the fixing tool 567 is rotated in this state to lock the main control apparatus 561. The Therefore, even if the main controller 561 is arranged in a state where it floats as described above, inconveniences such as dropping off of the main controller 561 can be avoided. In addition, since the main controller 561 cannot be removed unless the fixture 567 is unlocked from the back side of the first control board unit 501 (board mounting surface 552), it is expected to have a deterrent effect against illegal acts such as board removal. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 35 and the like, the mounting base 551 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 556 on the left end surface, and these support shafts 556 are attached to the support fitting 531 on the game board 16 side (see FIG. 32). Thus, the first control board unit 501 is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board 16. In addition, the mounting base 551 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nai latches 557 as fasteners at the right end portion and a horizontally long opening 558 at the upper end portion, and the tie latch 557 is connected to a to-be-fastened hole 532 (see FIG. 30) and the locking claw piece 533 (see FIG. 32) on the game board 16 side is locked to the opening 558 at the upper end portion, whereby the first control board unit 501 is fixed to the game board 16. . The support fitting 531 and the support shaft 556 correspond to the support shaft portion M1 in FIG. 21, the fastened hole 532 and the ny latch 557 correspond to the fastening portion M2, and the locking claw piece 533 and the opening 558 correspond to the locking claw portion M3, respectively. To do.

  Next, the second control board unit 502 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. 38 is a front view of the second control board unit 502, FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the unit 502, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 502.

  The second control board unit 502 has a horizontally long mounting base 601, and a payout / discharge control device 611, a power supply device 612 and a card unit connection board 613 are mounted on the mounting base 601. As is well known, the payout / release control device 611 and the power supply device 612 include a control board including an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that forms the center of control, various ports, and the like. With a control board (payout launch control board) constituting the payout launch control device 611, payout control of prize balls and rental balls and a ball launch unit 90 (launch solenoid 92 and electromagnet 104 according to the operation of the operation handle 310 by the player). ) Is performed. In a control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply device 612, a predetermined power supply voltage required by various control devices or the like is generated and output.

  The card unit connection board 613 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 210 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (not shown). The card unit connection board 613 takes in a ball lending operation command by the player and outputs it to the payout and launch control device 611. Is. Note that the card unit connection board 613 is unnecessary in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly from the ball lending device or the like to the upper plate without using the card unit.

  The payout / discharge control device 611, the power supply device 612, and the card unit connection substrate 613 are configured to be accommodated in substrate boxes 615 to 617 made of a transparent resin material, respectively. In particular, in the dispensing discharge control device 611, similarly to the main control device 561 described above, the box base and the box cover that constitute the substrate box 615 (encapsulating means) are connected by the sealing unit 619 (sealing means) so as not to be opened, As a result, the substrate box 615 is sealed.

  A state return switch 621 is provided at the right end portion of the payout launch control device 611. For example, when the state return switch 621 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 658a, the payout motor 658a is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball jam (return to the normal state). It is like that. An operation knob 622 of a variable resistor that adjusts the firing force of the firing solenoid 92 is provided at the left end of the payout firing control device 611. When the operation shaft 622 is rotated clockwise, the firing solenoid 92 is excited. When the operating shaft 622 is rotated counterclockwise, the exciting current (or voltage) of the firing solenoid 92 is lowered and the firing force is also lowered.

  The power supply device 612 is provided with a RAM erase switch 623. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of a power failure when returning from a power failure (power recovery) It has become. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when turning on the power, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 623. To do.

  The mounting base 601 is made of, for example, a colorless and transparent resin molded product, and flat board mounting surfaces 602 and 603 are provided on both the left and right sides of the surface. A power supply device 612 is mounted on the left substrate mounting surface 602, and a card unit connection substrate 613 is mounted on the right substrate mounting surface 603. The payout launch control device 611. A part thereof is mounted on the substrate box 616 of the power supply device 612 in an overlapping manner.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the mounting base 601 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 605 at the right end thereof. The support shafts 605 are formed in the support hole 538 (see FIG. 31) on the inner frame 13 side. By inserting from above, the second control board unit 502 is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, the mounting base 601 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nai latches 606 as fasteners at the left end, and the second latch 606 is inserted into the fastened hole 539 (see FIG. 31) on the inner frame 13 side, thereby The control board unit 502 is fixed to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened and closed. The support hole portion 537 and the support shaft 605 correspond to the support shaft portion M4 in FIG. 29, and the fastened hole 539 and the ny latch 606 correspond to the fastening portion M5, respectively.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 503 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 shows the back pack unit 503 viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 42 shows an exploded perspective view thereof. The back pack unit 503 is formed by integrating a resin-formed back pack 651 and a game ball payout unit 652.

  The back pack 651 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a substantially flat base portion 653 and a protective cover portion 654 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 654 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display device unit 80 (however, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned audio The lamp control device 562 is also enclosed. A large number of ventilation holes 654 a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover portion 654. Each of the vent holes 654a is formed to be thin and provided so that the ends of the vent holes 654a are adjacent to each other at a relatively close position. Therefore, the back surface of the back pack 651 can be easily opened by cutting the resin portion between the adjacent vent holes 654a. For this reason, predetermined | prescribed test | inspection etc. can be easily implemented by cut | disconnecting the resin part between the vent holes 654a and exposing the display control apparatus 505 grade | etc., Inside.

  A payout unit 652 is fixed to the back pack 651 with a screw so as to bypass the protective cover portion 654. The payout unit 652 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack 651 and is connected to the lower side of the tank 655 and the lower side of the tank 655. The tank rail 656 is gently inclined, the case rail 657 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 656 in the vertical direction, and is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 657, and has a predetermined electrical configuration such as a dispensing motor 658a. A payout device 658 for paying out game balls. The game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 655, and a required number of game balls are paid out by the payout device 658 as appropriate. The game balls paid out by the payout device 658 are supplied to the upper plate 201 and the like through a payout passage (not shown) built in the lower end portion of the back pack 651.

  A vibrator 660 for applying vibration to the tank rail 656 is attached to the tank rail 656. Therefore, if a ball clogging occurs near the tank rail 656, the ball clogging can be eliminated by driving the vibrator 660. Since this vibrator 660 is unitized, it can be easily attached to the side of the tank rail 656.

  Here, the configuration of the tank rail 656 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail 656. The tank rail 656 has a rail body 661 having a long bowl shape that opens upward, and a ball receiving portion 662 that is formed to be inclined in an arc shape on one side is provided at the start end of the rail body 661. . By this ball receiving portion 662, the game ball dropped from the tank 655 is smoothly taken into the rail body 661. Further, the rail body 661 is provided with a partition wall 663 extending in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball is divided into two hands by the partition wall 663. The two ball paths partitioned by the partition wall 663 are slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. On the bottom surface of each spherical passage partitioned by the partition wall 663, an opening 665 is provided that opens downward at both ends of the passage.

  In addition, a rectifying plate 667 is disposed on the rail main body 661 so as to cover the ceiling portion on the downstream side. The rectifying plate 667 is disposed so as to be gradually closer to the bottom surface so as to limit the height of the passage in the tank rail 656 toward the downstream side. Further, on the upstream side of the current plate, a movable rectifying weight that moves in a pendulum manner along the flow direction so as to contact only the upper game ball among the game balls flowing down in a highly stacked state and restrict the flow down (Not shown) is provided to hang down. Even if the game balls flow from the upstream portion of the tank rail 356 in a stacked state, the game balls in the tank rail 656 flow down while being aligned by the rectifying weight.

  The rail body 661 is formed of a black conductive polycarbonate resin, whereas the rectifying plate 667 is formed of a transparent polycarbonate resin so that the inside of the passage can be easily seen. Further, the rectifying plate 667 is detachably provided, and maintenance in the tank rail 656 can be easily performed by removing the rectifying plate 667.

  Returning to FIG. 41 and FIG. The payout unit 652 includes a payout relay board 681 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout launch control apparatus 611 to the payout apparatus 658, and a power switch board 682 for taking in the main power from the outside. The power switch board 682 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 682a.

  The members that form the path of the game ball from the tank 655 to the payout path are all formed of a conductive resin material (for example, conductive polycarbonate resin) and grounded (grounded) at a part thereof. Yes. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the noise by charging of a game ball is suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the back pack 651 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 685 at the right end thereof, and these support shafts 685 are supported on the support holes 538 on the inner frame 13 side (see FIG. 31). The back pack unit 503 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, the back pack 651 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nai latches 686 as fasteners at the left end portion, and is provided with a locking hole 687 at the upper end portion, and the nai latch 686 is connected to the fastening hole 540 ( The back pack unit 503 is fixed to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened and closed by engaging the fixing member 542 (see FIG. 31) on the inner frame 13 side with the locking hole 687. As shown in FIG. 41, a tank 355 for storing a game ball is provided on the left side of the locking hole 687, and this portion is not used for the fixing tool 542 and the locking hole 687. This is because it is firmly fixed. When the fixture 542 is fixed, the back pack unit 503 is also fixed to the inner frame 13 by the fixtures 541 and 543 (see FIG. 31) at the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the inner frame 13. The support hole portion 538 and the support shaft 685 correspond to the support shaft portion M6 in FIG. 29, the fastened hole 540 and the ny latch 686 correspond to the fastening portion M7, and the fixture 542 and the locking hole 687 correspond to the locking portion M8, respectively. . The fixing tool 543 corresponds to the locking portion M9.

  Next, a locking device for locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and locking the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 to the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. 44 is a front view of the locking unit 410, FIG. 45 is a front perspective view of the locking unit 410, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the locking unit 410. In order to avoid complication of the drawings, the coil spring is not shown in FIGS.

  The locking device is engaged with a locking unit 410 that is vertically long on the back surface of the inner frame 13 and on the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and hook members 411 to 413 that are slidably provided on the locking unit 410. And an engaging portion that maintains the inner frame 13 and the front frame 14 in a closed state. As the engaging portion, the metal fitting 23 of the outer frame 12, the front frame flange portion 14a of the front frame 14, and the lower plate engaging portion 15a of the lower plate unit 15 are applicable.

  A cylinder lock 420 having a key hole 421 is provided at the lower center of the locking unit 410 when viewed from the front. The locking of the inner frame 13 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 421 of the cylinder lock 420 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The locking unit 410 includes an eaves base 414 formed vertically and eaves members 411 to 413 that are slidably provided on the eaves base 414 and engage with the inner frame 13, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15, respectively. I have. The eaves base 414 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section by an attachment plate 415 in which a plurality of attachment holes are formed, and a support plate 416 that is orthogonal to the attachment plate 415 and supports the eaves members 411 to 413 and the like. The locking unit 410 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by tightening a mounting plate 415 of the flange base 414 with a screw at an end portion (left end portion in rear view) on the back surface side of the inner frame 13 and away from the opening / closing axis.

  The attachment plate 415 of the heel base 414 is provided with an insertion port 415a having a vertically long and substantially rectangular shape at the upper and lower portions thereof. When the front frame 14 is closed, the front end portion of the front frame flange portion 14a enters the insertion port 415a.

  A plate-like sliding rod 417 formed vertically along the supporting plate 416 is slidably arranged in the vertical direction inside the supporting plate 416 of the rod base 414. In addition, a hook member (an inner frame hook member) 411 that is slidably supported by the support plate 416 while being always pulled downward by a coil spring (not shown) is disposed at two upper and lower portions of the hook base 414. Yes. The inner frame hook member 411 is formed in a hook shape with the tip portion protruding downward, and is hooked on the metal fitting 23 of the outer frame 12 to lock the inner frame 13. The inner frame collar member 411 engages with the sliding collar 417 and slides upward only when the sliding collar 417 moves upward from the neutral position. The sliding rod 417 is urged downward by a reaction force having substantially the same magnitude as the pulling force of the coil spring that urges the inner frame collar member 411.

  The upper and lower two inner frame collar members 411 are independently movable upward. When the inner frame collar member 411 is moved and unlocked with a wire or the like, both inner frames are removed. The scissor member 411 must be moved upward. Even if only one of them is moved upward, the other inner frame flange member 411 remains hooked on the receiving bracket 23 of the outer frame 12. For this reason, an unauthorized unlocking operation becomes difficult and crime prevention is improved. Further, the inner frame collar member 411 moves upward as the sliding collar 417 slides upward. The sliding rod 417 slides upward in conjunction with the clockwise operation with the dedicated key with respect to the cylinder lock 420, and the locked state of the inner frame 13 can be released by operating the dedicated key. .

  Further, at two upper and lower portions of the flange base 414, a flange member (front frame flange member) 412 supported slidably by the mounting plate 415 and the support plate 416 while being always pulled upward by a coil spring (not shown). It is arranged. The front frame flange member 412 is formed by bending a metal plate into a U-shaped cross section, and a vertically long rectangular locking port 412a is formed on the surface on the mounting plate 415 side. Further, the front frame flange member 412 has the locking port 412a overlapping the insertion port 415a formed in the mounting plate 415, and the lower end of the locking port 412a is positioned above the insertion port 415a in the neutral state. Has been placed.

  When the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame flange portion 14a enters the insertion port 415a and also enters the locking port 412a. The lower end of the locking port 412a is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with the protruding portion at the front end of the front frame flange portion 14a, and the front frame flange member 412 is pushed down by the front frame flange portion 14a and slides downward. When the protruding portion at the front end of the front frame flange portion 14a completely enters the locking port 412a, the front frame flange member 412 rises and returns to the original position by the pulling force of the coil spring, and is caught by the front frame flange portion 14a. The front frame 14 is locked so as not to be opened. Further, the front frame collar member 412 moves downward as the sliding collar 417 slides downward. The sliding rod 417 slides downward in conjunction with the counterclockwise operation with the dedicated key with respect to the cylinder lock 420, and, like the inner frame 13, the front frame 13 is locked by operating the dedicated key. Is released.

  The interlocking mechanism between the cylinder lock 420 and the sliding rod 417 will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, the lock shaft of the cylinder lock 420 has two protrusions that enter the notch of the sliding rod 417 by its rotation. A cam plate 420a is attached. When the exclusive key is inserted clockwise into the key hole 421 of the cylinder lock 420 and rotated clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 44), the lower projection of the cam plate 420a enters the notch of the sliding rod 417. The sliding rod 417 is pushed upward. On the other hand, when the dedicated key is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) while being inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 420, the upper projection of the cam plate 420a enters the notch of the sliding rod 417. Then push down the sliding rod 417 downward. In this way, the inner frame collar member 411 and the front frame collar member 412 interlocked with the sliding collar 417 can be moved by freely sliding the single sliding collar 417 up and down by rotating the dedicated key. The locked state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the front frame 14 locked for each of the flange members 411 and 412 can be released by operating. Therefore, compared with the case where a plurality of sliding rods are respectively configured to be interlocked with the lock shaft of the cylinder lock, the component configuration is simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  A heel member (lower plate heel member) 413 that is slidably supported by the support plate 416 while being always pulled upward by a coil spring (not shown) is disposed below the heel base 414. The lower plate cage member 413 is for engaging the lower plate engaging portion 15a (see FIG. 27) provided in the lower plate unit 15 to lock the lower plate unit 15, and is located in the center along the vertical direction. The upper and lower two flanges 413a, which protrude from the upper and lower portions to the front side and further protrude from the tip, are hooked by the lower plate engaging portion 15a to restrict the opening of the lower plate unit 15.

  At the upper end of the lower plate ridge member 413, an operation portion 413b formed so as to protrude to the front surface side is provided, and the lower plate ridge member 413 can be pushed downward with a fingertip or the like. ing. The operation unit 413b of the lower dish unit 15 is always disposed at a position covered by the front frame 14, and can be exposed and operated only when the front frame 14 is opened.

  When opening the lower tray unit 13 in the closed state, first, the front frame 14 is opened so that the operation portion 413b of the lower tray unit 15 can be operated. After that, when the operation unit 413b is pressed against the urging force of the coil spring and the lower plate cage member 413 is moved downward, the lower plate engagement unit 15a provided on the lower plate unit 15 side and the lower plate cage member The engagement state of the 413 with the flange portion 413a is released, and an unlocked state in which the lower plate unit 15 can be opened simply by pulling it forward is possible.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 561 is equipped with an MPU 701 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 701 includes a ROM 702 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 701 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 702 is executed. A certain RAM 703 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  The RAM 703 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 612 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 703 temporarily stores various data and the like. A backup area 703a, a large opening opening flag 703b, and a solenoid control data memory 703c are provided in addition to a memory and an area for the purpose.

  The backup area 703a stores values such as a stack pointer, each register, and I / O when the power is shut down (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area 703a. Writing to the backup area 703a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 62), and restoration of each value written to the backup area 703a is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned on. . Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 742 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 701 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The large opening opening flag 703b is a flag indicating whether the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (set to an open state) or closed (set to a closed state). The large opening opening flag 703b is turned on when a big hit occurs, and as a result, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a due to the occurrence of the big hit is satisfied, the large opening opening flag 703b is turned off, and as a result, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Is closed.

  The solenoid control data memory 703c is a memory for storing solenoid control data generated by a solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 61) described later as a drive signal for driving the special winning opening solenoid 581. When the solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c is output to the input / output port 705, the large opening solenoid 581 is turned on (excited) or turned off (de-energized) according to the value. The structure of data (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c will be described later with reference to FIG.

  An input / output port 705 is connected to the MPU 701 of the main controller 561 via a bus line 704 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 705 is connected to a large opening solenoid 581, a RAM erasing switch circuit 743, a payout / release control device 611, a display control device 505, and a switch group (not shown).

  The payout launch control device 611 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by a payout motor 658a. The MPU 711 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 712 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 711, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 713 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similar to the RAM 703 of the main controller 561, the RAM 713 of the payout control device 611 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 612 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. The RAM 713 is provided with a backup area 713a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data.

  Further, the payout launch control device 611 controls the launch of the ball launch unit 90 (the launch solenoid 92 and the electromagnet 104) according to the operation of the operation handle 310 by the player. The launch solenoid 92 and the electromagnet 104 have predetermined conditions. Driving is allowed when it is in place. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 310 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 310 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid 92 is excited, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 310.

  The backup area 713a is an area for storing stack pointers, registers, I / O values, etc. when the power is turned off when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Based on the information in the backup area 713a, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off. Writing to the backup area 713a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt process, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 713a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the MPU 701 of the main controller 561, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 711 from the power failure monitoring circuit 742 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 711, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 715 is connected to the MPU 711 of the payout / release control device 611 via a bus line 714 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 743, a main controller 561, a payout motor 658a, a firing solenoid 92, an electromagnet 104, and the like are connected to the input / output port 715, respectively.

  The display control device 505 displays a variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) on the second symbol display device (LED) 82 and a variation display of the first symbol (special symbol) on the first symbol display device (LCD) 81. It is something to control. The display control device 505 includes an MPU 721, a ROM (program ROM) 722, a work RAM 723, a video RAM 724, a character ROM 725, an image controller 726, an input port 727, two output ports 728 and 729, and a bus line. 730 and 731. The input side of the input port 727 is connected to the output side of the main controller 561, and the output side of the input port 727 is connected to the MPU 721, ROM 722, work RAM 723, image controller 726, and output port via the bus line 729. 728 is connected. The output side of the output port 728 is connected to the second symbol display device 82, the sound lamp control device 562, the right door solenoid 177, and the left door solenoid 184. Further, an output port 729 is connected to the image controller 726 via a bus line 731, and the first symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 729.

  The MPU 721 of the display control device 505 controls the display contents of the first symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 82 based on the symbol display command transmitted from the main control device 561. The ROM 722 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 721 and fixed value data, and includes a door solenoid output off table 722a. This door solenoid output off table 722a provides door solenoid output off data for designating on or off for the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184, for each value counted by a solenoid off counter 723d described later. It is a table to store. The structure of the door solenoid output off table 722a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The work RAM 723 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 721. , A solenoid off counter 723d, a solenoid off counter activation flag 723e, a right door on / off counter 723f, and a left door on / off counter 723g.

  The right door opening flag 723a and the left door opening flag 723b are flags indicating whether the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened (open state) or closed (closed state), respectively. is there. These release flags 723a and 723b are respectively set according to the state of the variable display at that time. Specifically, when the right door 171 is opened, the right door opening flag 723a is turned on. On the other hand, when the right door 171 is closed, the right door opening flag 723a is turned off. Similarly to the right door opening flag 723a, the left door opening flag 723b is turned on when the left door 172 is opened, and is turned off when the left door 172 is closed.

  The solenoid control data memory 723c is a memory for storing solenoid control data generated by door solenoid control data output processing (see FIG. 68) described later as drive signals for driving the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184. is there. When the solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data memory 723c is output to the output port 728, the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are turned on (excited) according to the value, or , Off (de-energized). The solenoid control data memory 723c will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The solenoid off counter 723d is a counter that counts “0” and “1” in order to read the door solenoid output off data 722a1 (see FIG. 49A) from the door solenoid output off table 722a. When the solenoid off counter setting process (see FIG. 69) is executed in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68), the solenoid off counter 723d becomes the value of the right door on / off counter 723f and the left door on / off counter 723g. Accordingly, the initial value is set to “0” or “1”. Thereafter, every time the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68) is started (in this embodiment, every 2 ms), the value is “0” → “1” → “0” → “1” → “0” → It is updated in order. Although details will be described later, in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68), the right side of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 read from the door solenoid output off table 722a according to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d Energization (ON) and energization interruption (OFF) of the excitation current to the door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are controlled. As a result, the total current consumption amount energized to the solenoid to be controlled is controlled to be less than (or less than) the current consumption amount allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612.

  The solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is a flag indicating whether or not control according to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is being executed in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68). (See FIG. 68). Specifically, the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is a member (in this embodiment, the right door 171 and the movable door) that is moved by the solenoid controlled by the display control device 505 in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68). It is turned on when it is detected that the left door 172) has opened beyond a predetermined number (1 in the present embodiment), while it is detected that the number of members being opened is equal to or less than the predetermined number. When turned off. That is, the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is turned on while the control according to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is being executed in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68), and the solenoid off counter 723d While the control according to the value is unnecessary, it indicates OFF.

  The right door on / off counter 723f and the left door on / off counter 723g are counters for counting the length of time from the start of the opening of the right door 171 and the left door 172, respectively, and both have “0” as an initial value. Specifically, the right door on / off counter 723f starts counting from “1” when it is first detected that the right door opening flag 723a is on in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68). Each time the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68) is started, if the right door opening flag 723a is on, the value is sequentially incremented by one. On the other hand, when it is detected that the right door opening flag 723a is off, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is reset to “0”. Similarly to the right door on / off counter 723f, the left door on / off counter 723g is sequentially counted from “1” every time the left door open flag 723b is turned on in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68). When the door opening flag 723b indicates OFF, it is reset to “0”.

  The video RAM 724 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the first symbol display device 81, and the display content of the first symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 724. The character ROM 725 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 81. The image controller 726 adjusts the timings of the MPU 721, the video RAM 724, and the output port 729 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 724 from the character ROM 725 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply device 612 includes a power supply unit 741 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 742 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 743 having a RAM erase switch 623. ing. The power supply unit 741 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main control device 561, the payout / release control device 611, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 741 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the main controller 561, the payout control device 611, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 742 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 701 of the main control device 561 and the MPU 711 of the payout launch control device 611 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 742 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 741, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts, Power failure signal SG1 is output to main controller 561 and payout launch controller 611. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 561 and the payout launch controller 611 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 741 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 561 and payout launch controller 611 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 743 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main control device 561 and the payout / release control device 611 when the RAM erase switch 623 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 561 and the payout launch controller 611 clear the data in the respective backup areas 703a and 713a.

  Here, the solenoid control data memory 703c described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the configuration of data (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c for each bit.

  The solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c is 1-byte data as shown in FIG. The 0th bit in the 1-byte data is assigned as a bit for storing a value for controlling the driving of the large opening solenoid 581. If “1”, the excitation current of the large opening solenoid 581 is set. On the other hand, energization (ON) is instructed. On the other hand, if “0”, the energization cutoff (OFF) of the excitation current is instructed to the large opening solenoid 581.

  This solenoid control data (value stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c) is set by the value (on or off) of the large opening opening flag 703b in solenoid control data output processing (see FIG. 61) described later. Specifically, when it is detected that the large opening opening flag 703b is on during execution of the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 61), the first bit in the solenoid control data memory 703c is “1”. ”Is stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the large opening opening flag 703b is off,“ 0 ”is stored in the 0th bit of the solenoid control data memory 703c.

  When this solenoid control data (value stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c) is output to the input / output port 705 as a result of the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 61), it corresponds to the state of the 0th bit. The exciting current is energized (on) or de-energized (off) with respect to the large opening solenoid 581.

  Accordingly, when the 0th bit of the solenoid control data output to the input / output port 705 is “1”, the large opening solenoid 581 is excited (turned on), and as a result, the specific winning opening (large opening) ) 65a is opened. On the other hand, when the 0th bit is “0”, the large opening opening solenoid 581 is de-energized (off), and as a result, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed.

  Next, the door solenoid output off table 722a and the solenoid control data memory 723c described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing the door solenoid output off table 722a, and FIG. 49B is a diagram showing the configuration of data (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 723c for each bit. is there.

  In the door solenoid output off table 722a, as shown in FIG. 49A, door solenoid output off data 722a1 is associated with each value indicated by the solenoid off counter 723d. More specifically, door solenoid output off data 722a1 is stored at an address corresponding to each value indicated by the solenoid off counter 723d. Then, according to the value indicated by the solenoid off counter 723d, the door solenoid output off data 722a1 stored in the address corresponding to the value is read.

  Door solenoid output off data 722a1 is 1-byte data, and the 0th bit 722a2 is assigned as a bit for storing a value used to instruct excitation (on) or non-excitation (off) of the right door solenoid 177. Further, the first bit 722a3 is assigned as a bit for storing a value used for instructing excitation (ON) or non-excitation (OFF) of the left door solenoid 184. Depending on the state of each bit 722a2 and 722a3 in the door solenoid output off data 722a1 and the value (on or off) of the right door opening flag 723a or the left door opening flag 723b, door solenoid control data output processing (FIG. 68), the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are instructed to energize (turn on) or de-energize (off) the energizing current.

  Specifically, when the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is on (when the solenoid off counter 723d is activated), when the 0th bit 722a2 of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 is “1”, the right door If the open flag 723a is on, the right door solenoid 177 is instructed to energize (turn on) the excitation current. If the right door open flag 723a is off, the right door solenoid 177 is deenergized. (Off) is instructed. On the other hand, when the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is on (when the solenoid off counter 723d is activated), if the 0th bit 722a2 of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 is “0”, the right door opening flag Regardless of the value of 723a (on or off), the right door solenoid 177 is instructed to cut off the energization current (off). That is, the right door opening flag 723a indicates ON, and even when the right door 171 is open, the right door solenoid 177 is instructed to cut off the energization current (OFF).

  Similarly, when the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is on (when the solenoid off counter 723d is activated), and the first bit 722a3 of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 is “1”, the left door opening flag If 723a is on, energization of the excitation current is instructed to the left door solenoid 184 (on), but if the left door open flag 723b is off, the energization of the left door solenoid 184 is cut off (off). ) Is instructed. On the other hand, when the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is on (when the solenoid off counter 723d is activated), if the first bit 722a3 of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 is “0”, the left door opening flag Regardless of the value of 723b (ON or OFF), the left door solenoid 184 is instructed to turn off the excitation current (OFF).

  Therefore, according to the door solenoid output off table 722a, when the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is “0”, the right door solenoid 177 is not related to the value (on or off) of the right door opening flag 723a. The left door solenoid 184 is energized (on) or de-energized (off) according to the value (on or off) of the left door opening flag 723b. That is, if the left door opening flag 723b is on, the left door solenoid 184 is energized (on), while if the left door opening flag 723b is off, the left door solenoid 184 is de-energized (on). The

  When the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is “1”, the left door solenoid 184 is de-energized (off) regardless of the value (on or off) of the left door opening flag 723b. The right door solenoid 177 is energized (on) or de-energized (off) according to the value (on or off) of the right door opening flag 723a. That is, if the right door opening flag 723a is on, the right door solenoid 177 is energized (on), while if the right door opening flag 723a is off, the right door solenoid 177 is de-energized (on). The

  Although details will be described later (see, for example, FIG. 70), the 0th bit 722a2 of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 is “despite the right door 171 being open (the right door open flag 723a is on)”. Even if the exciting current to the right door solenoid 177 is turned off (off) by being “0”, it is an intermittent in which the conduction rate is (1/2) × 100%. Since it is the energization cut-off period in the excitation current, the right door 171 is kept open (or opened) without closing. Similarly, for the left door 172, the first door 722a3 of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 is “0” even though the left door is open (the left door opening flag 723b is on). Even when the exciting current to the solenoid 184 is turned off (off), the left door 172 is kept open (or opened) without closing.

  The solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data memory 723c is 1-byte data as shown in FIG. The 0th bit in the 1-byte data is assigned as a bit for storing a value for controlling the driving of the right door solenoid 177, and the first bit stores a value for controlling the driving of the left door solenoid 184. Assigned as a bit. If the value stored in the 0th bit or the 1st bit is “1”, the energization (on) of the excitation current to the corresponding solenoids 177 and 184 is instructed. Instruct to turn off the energization current to the corresponding solenoids 177 and 184.

  When this solenoid control data (value stored in the solenoid control data memory 723c) is output to the output port 728 as a result of door solenoid control data output processing (see FIG. 68) described later, the 0th bit and the 1st bit Depending on the state of the eyes, the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are turned on or off, whereby the right door 171 and the left door 172 are independently opened or closed. Specifically, when the 0th bit in the solenoid control data output to the output port 728 is “1”, the right door solenoid 177 is excited (turned on), and thus the right door 171 is opened. When the 0th bit is “0”, the right door solenoid 177 is not energized (off). In this case, if the right door opening flag 723a is off, the right door 171 is closed (or remains closed). On the other hand, when the right door opening flag 723a is ON, it corresponds to a non-excitation period in energization of intermittent energization current (1/2) × 100% applied to the right door solenoid 177. (See, for example, FIG. 70) The right door 171 remains open (or opened) without closing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the 1st symbol displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 81 and the display content of the 1st symbol display apparatus 81 are demonstrated. FIG. 50 is a diagram individually showing the first symbol, FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81, and FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing section setting and effective line setting, and FIG. 51B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen G. FIG.

  The first symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one kind of sub-pattern of petal shape formed smaller than the main symbols. As shown in FIG. 50 (a) to FIG. 50 (i), each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “0” to “9” on a rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which an odd number ( The main symbols with 1,3,5,7,9) have a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box almost to the full, and attached symbols imitating characters such as furoshiki and helmets, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, although mentioned later for details, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is comprised so that a big hit may generate | occur | produce when the same main symbol is prepared. In this case, the main symbol to which the odd number is added corresponds to a “high probability symbol”, and when the high probability symbols all come together and the jackpot is reached, the special winning state 65a is released a predetermined number of times over a predetermined time period. After that, it shifts to a high probability state. On the other hand, the main symbol to which an even number is added corresponds to a “low probability symbol”, and when the low probability symbols are all in a big win, the special game state is entered, but in such a case, the high probability state is not entered. . Here, the high probability state is a state in which the combination of the first symbol becomes a jackpot as a combination of the predetermined probability variation symbols, and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value, that is, when so-called probability variation (probability change). Say. Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not probable, and refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability change.

  Next, the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the display screen G of the first symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for displaying the first symbol in a variable manner, The upper 1/3 other than is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described first symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. For this reason, a total of 20 first symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The display is changed. In particular, the main symbol numbers are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the main symbol numbers are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  In the main display area Dm, the first symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the first symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine first symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on any active line at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot if the same combination of main symbols) is arranged.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are normally covered with a double-open opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid, and sometimes the solenoid is excited and the door is opened to the front side. The display area is visible to the player. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the first symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If either one of the left and right doors or both doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and it is easy for the player to change to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting it out. The display screen of the first symbol display device 81 is basically divided into upper and lower display areas Dm, Ds, but displays the first symbol, characters, etc. larger across the display areas Dm, Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the MPU 701 in the main control device 561 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot lottery, setting the symbol display of the first symbol display device 81, and the like. Specifically, As shown in FIG. 52, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 81, and the first symbol display device 81 fluctuate and change. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, variation type counters CS1, CS2 used for variation pattern selection of the first symbol display device 81, , Left, middle and right out symbol counters CL, CM, CR used to set each out symbol in the left, middle and right columns It is set to be there. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82.

  Among these counters, the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 are loop counters that each add 1 to the previous value and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the MPU 701, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 703. The RAM 703 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has an access to the first entrance 64. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in accordance with the winning timing of the game ball.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once every timer interruption and within the remaining time of normal processing. Will be updated repeatedly. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703 at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64. The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the values are “337,673”. There are 10 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661”.

  The jackpot symbol counter C2 determines a symbol when the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 81 is stopped in the case of a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 81 has five effective lines. Since 10 kinds of specific symbols (main symbols) are set, 50 (0 to 49) counter values are prepared. In other words, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured so that one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 49, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 49), it returns to 0. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703 at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the reach random number counter C3 causes the last stop symbol to stop after the reach has occurred by shifting the last stop symbol by one before and after the reach symbol. Similarly, after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is the reach symbol. “Reach other than front / rear out” and stop “complete out” that does not occur reach. For example, the reach random number counter C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the front / rear out of reach, the reach random number counter C3 = 2-21 corresponds to the reach other than the front / rear out, and the reach random number counter C3 = 22-238 corresponds to the complete out. Reach lottery may be set individually according to the state of the lottery probability of the first symbol display device 81, the number of suspended balls at the start of change, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703 at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of the first symbol, such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol ( In the present embodiment, a more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined when the first symbol display device 81 starts the variation of the first symbol.

  The left, middle and right off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used to determine the stop symbol of the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol row Z3 when the big hit lottery is missed. In addition, since any one of the 20 first symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol is displayed in each stage of each column, 20 counter values (0 to 19) are prepared for each. The left, upper, middle and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CL, the upper, middle and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CM, and the right symbol column is determined by the out symbol counter CR. The top, middle and bottom symbols are determined.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the MPU 701. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, the current value is determined by subtracting 20. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated within the normal processing so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach of the RAM 703 front / rear symbol symbol buffer, reach other than front / rear out It is stored in either the symbol buffer or the completely off symbol buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the first symbol, the buffer value of any one of the front and rear outreach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear outlier, and the completely out symbol symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3. The

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, if importance is attached to irregularity, it is desirable that the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and it is detected that the game ball has passed either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 701 in the main controller 561 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 53 to 62. The MPU 701 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “ms”)). And an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined time intervals (every 2 ms in this embodiment) by the MPU 701 of the main controller 561. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S601). That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 623) connected to the main controller 561 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Next, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated (S602). Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 703.

  Further, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are updated (S603). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values reach the maximum values (in the present embodiment, 676, 49 and 238, respectively). Each time it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 703. After that, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning in the first entrance 64 (S604).

  The start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined from the detection information of the operation port switch 524 whether or not the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (start prize) (S701). If it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), is the number N of pending action balls of the first symbol display device 81 less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment)? It is determined whether or not (S702). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S702: Yes), the number of reserved balls N is incremented by 1 (S703), and further updated in step S603. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703 (S704). On the other hand, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number N of operation reservation balls is not N <4 (S702: No) , S703 and S704 are skipped, and the start winning process is terminated.

  In addition, when the game ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the first symbol, but after the start winning, There is a restriction that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) must elapse before the symbol changes and the symbol stops. Therefore, in the start winning process, when a start winning is confirmed, a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start winning is set after each counter value storing process (S704). Specifically, since the start winning process is executed at a cycle of 2 ms, for example, in order to measure an elapsed time of 5 seconds, a numerical value “2500” is set in the timer, and the timer value is incremented by 1 for each start winning process. Subtract. This timer value is stored and managed in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703 together with the values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In setting the first symbol variation pattern, which will be described later, the timer value is referred to, and a variation pattern is set according to the remaining time (so that the symbol variation is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed).

  Again, referring back to FIG. After the start winning process is completed, a solenoid control data output process for outputting a drive signal to the large opening solenoid 581 according to various situations is executed (S605).

  Here, the solenoid control data output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this solenoid control data output process, first, the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c is cleared (S1401). That is, “0” is set to all the bits constituting the solenoid control data memory 703c (see FIG. 48).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the large opening opening flag 703b is on (S1402). If it is on (S1402: Yes), “1” is set to the 0th bit of the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c ( In S1404, the value stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c is output to the input / output port 705 (S1403), and the solenoid control data output process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the large opening opening flag 703b is turned off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1402, the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1403.

  When the value (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c is output to the input / output port 705 by the processing of S1403, the large open port is set according to the value of the 0th bit of the output solenoid control data. The solenoid 581 is turned on or off. Accordingly, while the large opening flag 703b is turned on, that is, while the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being opened, the solenoid control data in which the 0th bit is “1” in the processing of S1403. The value in the memory 703 is output to the input / output port 705. As a result, the exciting current is continuously supplied to the large opening solenoid 581 while the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being opened.

  Then, after the solenoid control data output process ends, the MPU 701 once ends this timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 701 of the main controller 561 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the state of the main controller 561 at the time of power shut-off is stored in the backup area 703a of the RAM 703. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 742 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 701 in the main controller 561, and the MPU 701 interrupts the control being executed. NMI interrupt processing is started. The NMI interrupt processing program in FIG. 62 is stored in the ROM 702 of the main controller 561. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 741 so that the processing of the main controller 561 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

  In the NMI interrupt process, first, the used register is saved in the backup area 703a of the RAM 703 (S801), and the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 703a (S802). Further, the occurrence information of the power shutdown is set in the backup area 703a (S803), and a power shutdown notification command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to another control device (S804). A RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 703a (S805). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 703. Thereafter, access to the RAM 703 is prohibited (S806), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  The above NMI interruption process is also executed in the same manner in the payout / release control device 611. With this NMI interrupt process, the state of the payout / discharge control device 611 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like changes the backup area 713a of the RAM 713. Is remembered. Similarly, the power supply unit 741 supplies power so that the process of the payout / discharge control device 611 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 742 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 711 in the payout and emission control device 611, and the MPU 711 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 62 is started. The contents are the same as described above, except that the power-off notification command is not transmitted in step S804.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 701 in the main controller 561. This main process is started by a reset at power-on. In the main process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sound lamp control device 562, payout launch control device 611, etc.) to become operable. , Wait processing (for example, about 1 second) is executed. Next, after a payout permission command is transmitted to the payout launch control device 611 (S102), access to the RAM 703 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 623 provided in the power supply device 612 is turned on (S104). If the RAM erase switch 623 is turned on (S104: Yes), processing is performed to clear (erase) the backup data. The process proceeds to S114. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 623 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 703a of the RAM 703 (S105). (S105: No), since backup data is not stored, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S114. If the occurrence information of power shutdown is stored in the backup area 703a (S105: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S106), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, calculated. If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S114. As described above, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 703. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 703 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 623. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 623 is pressed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (S114 to S116) of the RAM 703. Similarly, when the occurrence information of power shutdown is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing (S114 to S116) of the RAM 703 in the same manner. That is, in the initialization process of the RAM 703 from S114, the used area of the RAM 703 is cleared to 0 (S114), and the initial value of the RAM 703 is set (S115). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S116), and the process proceeds to normal processing described later. When the initialization process (S114 to S116) of the RAM 703 is performed, the large opening port flag 703b is turned off, and the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c is cleared to zero.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 623 is not turned on (S104: No), the occurrence information of the power shutdown is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S107: Yes), the process proceeds to S108, and the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power-off recovery) is executed. That is, in the power recovery process, the stack pointer at the time of power interruption is restored (S108), and the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared (S109). Next, a power-return command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted (S110), and the used register is returned from the backup area 703a of the RAM 703 (S111). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the interrupt is permitted before the power is turned off (S112). If the interrupt is permitted (S112: Yes), the interrupt is permitted (S113), while the interrupt is prohibited when the power is turned off. If it is in the state (S112: No), the processing is returned to the address before the power is shut off while the interruption is prohibited.

  Next, normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout launch control device 611. Further, when the first symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the first symbol, a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, a confirmation command, and the like are transmitted to the display control device 505. In addition, after the start of the first symbol variation, each time normal processing is performed in the order of the variation pattern command → the left symbol row Z1 stop symbol command → the middle symbol row Z2 stop symbol command → the right symbol row Z3 stop symbol command. The commands are transmitted one by one (that is, one every 4 ms), and the confirmation command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation time.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is updated (S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 703. Further, the outlier counters CL, CM, and CR of the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol row Z3 are updated by the off symbol counter updating process (S203).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the off symbol counter update process will be described. First, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the out symbol counter CL of the left symbol row Z1 (S301). If it is the update time (S301: Yes), the out symbol counter CL in the left symbol row Z1 is updated (S303). . Next, if it is not the update time of the left symbol row Z1 (S301: No), it is determined whether it is the update time of the out symbol counter CM of the middle symbol row Z2 (S302), and if it is the update time (S302: Yes). ), The outlier symbol counter CM of the middle symbol row Z2 is updated (S304). Furthermore, if it is not the update time of the middle symbol row Z2 (S302: No), it is the update time of the right symbol row Z3, so the outlier symbol counter CR of the right symbol row Z3 is updated (S305).

  In updating outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in each of the processes of S303 to S305, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 20 is added when the addition result exceeds the maximum value. Subtraction is performed, and the result of the calculation is taken as the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR. According to the update process of CL, CM, CR, the outlier counters CL, CM, CR of the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol row Z3 are sequentially updated one by one in one normal process. Therefore, the update times of the counter values do not overlap. Thus, every time the normal process is executed three times, the set symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated for one set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a jackpot symbol combination (S306). If the symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination (S306: Yes), this process is performed as it is. finish. If it is not a jackpot symbol combination (S306: No), it is determined whether or not it is a reach symbol combination (S307). If it is a reach symbol combination (S307: Yes), then it is a back-and-forth outreach. It is determined whether or not there is (S308). If it is a combination of front and rear detach reach (S308: Yes), the combination of the detachment symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear detach reach symbol buffer of the RAM 703 (S309). If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are combinations other than front / rear out of reach (S308: No), the combination of out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out of RAM 703 (S310). ). If the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is not a jackpot symbol combination (S306: No) and is not a reach symbol combination (S307: No), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a reach symbol. In such a case, the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is stored in the complete off symbol buffer of the RAM 703 (S311).

  After completion of the off symbol counter CL, CM, CR update process (S203), the process returns to the normal process of FIG. A first symbol variation process for performing variation display of the first symbol by the one symbol display device 81 is executed (S205). By this first symbol variation process, jackpot determination, setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol, and the like are performed. Details of the first symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the first symbol variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 32 is executed in the case of the big win state (S206).

  Here, the large opening opening / closing process (S206) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the large opening opening / closing process, first, it is confirmed whether or not a big hit is being made at that time (S1301). Note that the jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the first symbol display device 81 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. If the result of the confirmation in S1301 shows that the jackpot is being hit (S1301: Yes), the large opening opening flag 703b is turned on (S1302).

  When the large opening opening flag 703b is turned on by the processing of S1302, the application (energization) of intermittent excitation current to the large opening solenoid 581 is started according to the solenoid control data output processing (S605) described above, As a result, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened.

  After the processing of S1302, it is confirmed whether or not the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has elapsed (S1303). In this case, if the maximum opening time has not yet elapsed (S1303: No), it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a ( S1304).

  When it is confirmed by the process of S1303 that the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has elapsed (S1303: Yes), or by the processing of S1304, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is played. When it is confirmed that a predetermined number of balls have been won (S1304: Yes), the large opening opening flag 703b is turned off (S1305), assuming that one round of the big hit state has ended.

  When the large opening opening flag 703b is turned off by the processing of S1305, the energization of the excitation current to the large opening solenoid 581 is interrupted according to the solenoid control data output process (S605) described above, and as a result, the specific prize opening (Large opening) 65a is closed.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S1305, if the specified number of game balls have not yet won in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S1304: Yes), the processing of S1305 is skipped. The opening / closing process of the opening is finished.

  If the result of the confirmation in S1301 is not a big hit now (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1310.

  That is, in the large opening opening / closing process described above, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a specified number of game balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you did. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. At this time, the specific winning opening 65a is allowed to be continuously opened on condition that the game ball has passed the specific area, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed by a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 16 rounds). This process is repeatedly executed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the large opening opening / closing process, display control of the second symbol (for example, symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S207). Briefly, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing and the second symbol display device 82. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time. Although illustration is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 59, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process (S208). If (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process (S208: No), the random number initial value is within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next normal process is executed. The value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210). First, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated (S209). Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 703. Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 703.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Next, the first symbol variation process (S205) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the first symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S401). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the first symbol display device 81 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S401: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the first symbol display device 81 is displaying the variation of the first symbol (S402), and if the first symbol is not being varied (S402: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 81 is greater than 0 (S403). If the number N of active suspension balls is 0 (S403: No), this process is ended as it is. If the number of the operation holding balls N> 0 (S403: Yes), the operation holding ball number N is decremented by 1 (S404), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is shifted (S405). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The reserved first area → the execution area, the reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the first symbol variation start process is executed (S406). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S402, when the variation of the first symbol is being displayed (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S407). The variation time of the first symbol is determined according to the variation pattern of the first symbol, and the execution of the process of S408 is skipped until the variation time has elapsed (S407: No). On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol elapses (S407: Yes), the confirmation command set for the confirmation of the stop symbol is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S501). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is based on the relationship between the jackpot random number counter value and the mode at that time. As described above, “337,673” is a winning value among the numerical values 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523” at the high probability. “601, 661” is the winning value.

  When it is determined that the game is a big hit (S501: Yes), the symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, the jackpot symbol is the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the symbol. The symbol is obtained based on a table (not shown) representing the corresponding relationship, and the symbol is set as a stop symbol command (S502). At this time, the numbers 0 to 49 of the jackpot symbol counter C2 correspond to any of the 50 jackpot symbols on all five active lines, and any one of the 50 jackpot symbols is set in the stop symbol command. Is done. Among these jackpot symbols, when a predetermined specific symbol (in this embodiment, an odd-numbered main symbol) is aligned, the process proceeds to a probabilistic state, but a symbol that is not a specific symbol (in this embodiment, an even number) If the numbers are aligned in the main symbol), the probability change state is not entered.

  Next, the variation pattern of the first symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command (S503). At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 703 are checked, and the reach type such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and other roughly based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 And the elapsed time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 (in other words, the number of variable symbols) ) Etc. to determine a finer pattern variation mode. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the variation pattern can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Whether to set the pattern or to set the pattern with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. The same applies to the setting of the fluctuation pattern in the case of performing front / rear out of reach display, reach display other than front / rear out, and complete out of display described later.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the game is not a big hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area ( If a reach has occurred (S504: Yes), it is also determined whether or not the front / rear reach has been reached based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 (S505). In the present embodiment, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is any one of 0 to 238, of which “0, 1” corresponds to the out-of-front reach and “2-21” corresponds to the reach other than the back-and-forth out- “22 to 238” corresponds to no reach (complete detachment).

  When front / rear out of reach has occurred (S505: Yes), the left, middle, and right out of symbol counters CL, CM, CR stored in the front / rear out of reach design buffer of the RAM 703 are set as stop symbol commands ( S506). In addition, a fluctuation pattern for front / rear out of reach display is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is set as a fluctuation pattern command (S507). At this time, similarly to the processing of S503, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 703 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The reach type (such as the middle symbol in the present embodiment) is stopped after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 In other words, a more detailed symbol variation mode such as the number of variation symbols) is determined.

  When a reach other than front / rear out occurs (S505: No), the left, middle and right out symbol counters CL, CM, CR stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out of RAM 703 are set as stop symbol commands. (S508). Further, a variation pattern for reach display other than front / rear deviation is determined, and the variation pattern is set in a variation pattern command (S509). At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 703, as in the process of S503.

  If neither big hit nor reach (S501: No, S504: No), the left, middle, and right off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the RAM 703 completely off symbol buffer are stopped. The symbol command is set (S510). Also, a variation pattern for complete out-of-range display is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command (S511). At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 703, as in the process of S503. As described above, when the setting of the stop symbol command and the fluctuation pattern command is completed in any of the big hit, the reach occurrence, and the reach non-occurrence, this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the payout and launch control executed by the MPU 711 in the payout launch control device 611 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a main process of the payout / discharge control device 611, and this main process is started by a reset at power-on.

  First, initial setting processing accompanying power-on is executed (S901). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Next, it waits for reception of the payout permission command transmitted from the main controller 561 (S902: No). When a payout permission command is received (S902: Yes), RAM access is permitted (S903), and an external interrupt vector is set (S904).

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 713 in the MPU 711. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 623 provided in the power supply device 612 is pressed (S905). If it is turned on (S905: Yes), the backup data is cleared (erased). The process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 623 is not turned on (S905: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 713a of the RAM 713 (S906). S906: No), since the backup data is not stored, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S915. If the occurrence information of power shutdown is stored in the backup area 713a (S906: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S907), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S908: No), that is, calculated. If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S915. As described above, the RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 713, for example. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 is correctly stored.

  In the initialization process of the RAM 713 from S915, the used area of the RAM 713 is cleared to 0 (S915), and the initial value of the RAM 713 is set (S916). Thereafter, the MPU 711 peripheral device is initialized (S917), an interrupt is permitted (S918), and the process proceeds to a payout launch control process to be described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 623 has not been pressed (S905: No), the occurrence information of the power shutdown has been set (S906: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S908: Yes), processing at power recovery (processing at power-off restoration) is executed. That is, the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown is restored (S909), and the information on occurrence of power shutdown is cleared (S910). The MPU 711 peripheral device is initialized (S911), and the used register is restored from the backup area 713a of the RAM 713 (S912). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the interrupt is permitted before the power is turned off (S913). If the interrupt is permitted (S913: Yes), the interrupt is permitted (S914), while the interrupt is prohibited when the power is turned off. If it is in the state (S913: No), the processing is returned to the address before the power is shut off while the interruption is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64, the payout / emission control process will be described. This payout launch control process is executed following the main process of the payout launch control device 611. In the payout launch control process, first, a command from the main control device 561 is acquired, and the total number of prize balls is stored (S1001). Next, the touch control of the operation handle and the state of the rotation amount are detected, and a firing control process for exciting the firing solenoid 92 and the electromagnet 104 as necessary is performed (S1002). Next, as a result of checking the state return switch 621, when it is determined that the state return operation starts, the state return operation is executed (S1003).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 301 (S1004). That is, when the lower pan 301 is detected by the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full, and when the lower pan full state is not reached. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S1005). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of the state to be notified is determined, and if there is a state to be notified, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout and launch control device 611 is notified (S1006).

  Next, prize ball payout processing is executed by each processing of S1007 to S1009. That is, if the prize ball is not paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in the process of S1001 is not 0 (S1007: No, S1008: No), the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 65 is started (S1009). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S1007: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process. The prize ball control process will be described later.

  In the rental ball payout processing of S1010 to S1012, if the ball payout is not possible and a loan ball payout request is received from the card unit (S1010: No, S1011: Yes), the ball rental shown in FIG. Control processing is started. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S1010: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S1011: No), the subsequent ball removal process is executed (S1013). The ball rental control process will be described later.

  In the ball removal process (S1013), the state return switch 621 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the dispensing motor 658a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. Subsequently, the control of vibrator 660 (vibrating motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S1014). Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout / release control process, and thereafter, the process described above is repeated.

  Next, the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 65 will be described. In the winning ball control process, firstly, the payout motor 658a is driven to rotate in the forward direction to pay out the winning ball (S1101). Whether the rotation of the payout motor 658a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S1102). If not normal (S1102: No), the payout motor 658a is driven to execute a retry process and the payout motor 658a. The stop process is executed (S1103), and then the process returns to the payout launch control process of FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 658a is normal (S1102: Yes), it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether the game ball is normally counted (S1104). If the game ball count is not normal (S1104: No), the payout motor 658a is driven to execute a retry process and the payout motor 658a is stopped (S1105). Return to.

  Further, if the game ball count is normal (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed (S1106). If completed (S1106: Yes), a stop process of the payout motor 658a is executed (S1107), and then the process returns to the payout launch control process of FIG. On the other hand, if the payout has not been completed (S1106: No), the process returns to the payout launch control process of FIG.

  The ball rental control process shown in FIG. 66 will be described. In the ball lending control process, first, the payout motor 658a is driven to rotate in the reverse direction to pay out a lending ball (S1201). Whether the rotation of the payout motor 658a is normal or not is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S1202). The stop process is executed (S1203), and then the process returns to the payout launch control process of FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 658a is normal (S1202: Yes), it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted (S1204). If the game ball count is not normal (S1204: No), the payout motor 658a is driven to execute a retry process, and the payout motor 658a is stopped (S1205). Return to.

  Further, if the game ball count is normal (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is completed ( If payout has been completed (S1206: Yes), stop processing of the payout motor 658a is executed (S1207), and then the process returns to the payout launch control process of FIG. On the other hand, if the payout has not been completed (S1206: No), the process returns to the payout launch control process of FIG.

  Next, display and effect control executed by the MPU 721 in the display control device 505 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the main process of the display control device 505. This main process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In this main process, first, initialization of the work RAM 723 and the video RAM 724 is performed (S1501). By the initialization process of S1501, the right door opening flag 723a and the left door opening flag 723b are both turned off, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c is cleared to 0, and the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is 0 is shown. In addition, by the initialization process of S1501, the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is turned off, and the values of the right door on / off counter 723f and the left door on / off counter 723g are both 0.

  After the process of S1501, the variable display process is executed (S1502). In this variation display process, the first symbol display device 561 performs a variation display according to various commands set in the first symbol variation process (FIGS. 56 and 57) described above. Specifically, according to the variation pattern command set by the above-described variation display start processing (see FIG. 57), variation display is started in the first symbol display device 81, and by the above-described first symbol variation processing (FIG. 56). According to the set confirmation command, the confirmation display with the stop symbol is performed. In the variable display process, a control command for controlling sound and lamp display is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 562 in accordance with the state of variable display in the first symbol display device 81.

  Next, right door opening flag and left door opening flag setting processing is executed (S1503). That is, the right door opening flag 723a and the left door opening flag 723b are turned on or off, respectively, according to the current fluctuation display status.

  After the processing of S1503, door solenoid control data output processing for controlling application of excitation current to the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 is executed (S1504). The door solenoid control data output process will be described later.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the execution timing of the next process of S1502 has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (2 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process of S1502 (S1505). If time has passed (S1505: Yes), the process proceeds to S1502, and each process of S1502 to S1504 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the process of S1502 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), the process returns to the process of S1505, until the predetermined time is reached, that is, the next S1502 Wait until the execution timing of the process is reached.

  Next, door solenoid control data output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the door solenoid control data output process, first, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c is cleared (S1601). That is, “0” is set to all the bits constituting the solenoid control data memory 723c (see FIG. 49B).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the right door opening flag 723a is on (S1602). If it is off (S1602: No), the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is reset to “0” (S1603). Transition to processing. On the other hand, if the right door opening flag 723a is on (S1602: Yes) as a result of checking in the processing of S1602, “1” is set to the 0th bit of the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c (S1613). Then, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is incremented by 1 (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1604.

  When the right door opening flag 723a is off in the door solenoid control data output processing by the processing of S1601 to S1603 and S1613 to S1614, that is, while the right door 171 is closed, the right door on / off counter The value of 723f is set to “0”, but once the right door opening flag 723a is turned on, that is, when the opening of the right door 171 is started, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is incremented by one. 1 ”. Thereafter, while the right door opening flag 723a is turned on, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is incremented by 1 every time the door solenoid control data output process is started, that is, every 2 ms in the present embodiment. When the state of the right door 171 shifts from open to closed, that is, when the right door open flag 723a is detected to be off, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is reset to “0”. Accordingly, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f indicates a measure of the time during which the right door 171 is open.

  Next, in the process of S1604, it is confirmed whether or not the left door opening flag 723b is on. In this case, if it is off (S1604: No), the value of the left door on / off counter 723g is reset to “0” (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606. On the other hand, if the left door opening flag 723b is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S1604 (S1604: Yes), “1” is set to the first bit of the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c (S1615). Then, the value of the left door on / off counter 723g is incremented by 1 (S1616), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  As in the case of the right door on / off counter 723f described above, the value of the left door on / off counter 723g also indicates the length of time that the left door 172 is opened by the processing of S1601, S1604 to S1605, and S1615 to S1616. . Therefore, by comparing the value of the left door on / off counter 723g and the value of the right door on / off counter 723f, it can be determined which of the left door 172 and the right door 171 has been opened first.

  Next, in the process of S1606, the number of open flags that are turned on among the open flags (in this embodiment, the right door open flag 723a and the left door open flag 723b) controlled by the display control device 505 is a predetermined number. It is confirmed whether it is below (in this embodiment, 1 or less). The predetermined number used as a determination criterion in the processing of S1606 is a number allocated in advance to the display control device 505 according to the power supply capacity of the control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply apparatus 612. Specifically, the amount of current consumed by driving is the number of solenoids that is equal to or less than (or less than) the amount allowed for the display control device 505 according to the power supply capacity. In the present embodiment, as an example The number is assumed to be “1”. Meanwhile, similarly to the display control device 505 described above, the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid corresponding to the power supply capacity is assigned to other control devices such as the main control device 561, and The sum of the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid assigned to the control board is configured to be less than (or less than) the amount allowed by the power supply capacity.

  As a result of checking in the processing of S1606, if the number of open flags that are turned on exceeds a predetermined number (“1” in the present embodiment) (S1606: No), the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is turned on. (S1607). At this time, if it is confirmed that the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is off (S1607: Yes), the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e, which is a flag indicating that the control by the solenoid off counter 723d is being executed. Is turned on (S1608). Next, a solenoid off counter setting process for setting an initial value of the solenoid off counter 723d is executed (S1609). The solenoid-off counter setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S1609, the process proceeds to S1610.

  Here, the solenoid-off counter setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the solenoid off counter setting process, first, it is confirmed whether all the values of the on / off counter corresponding to each solenoid are the same (S1701). In the present embodiment, the display control device 505 is provided with a right door on / off counter 723f and a left door on / off counter 723g as on / off counters. Therefore, in S1701, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f and the left door on / off counter 723g Check if the value of is the same.

  If the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is different from the value of the left door on / off counter 723g (S1701: No) as a result of the confirmation in S1701, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f and the value of the left door on / off counter 723g And whether the solenoid having the larger value is the right door solenoid 177 corresponding to the right door on / off counter 723f or the left door solenoid 184 corresponding to the left door on / off counter 723g is confirmed. (S1702).

  If the value of the right door on / off counter 723f corresponding to the right door solenoid 177 is larger as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1702 (S1702: right door solenoid), the value of the solenoid off counter is set to “0” (S1703). . On the other hand, if the value of the left door on / off counter 723g corresponding to the left door solenoid 184 is larger as a result of the confirmation in S1702 (S1702: left door solenoid), the value of the solenoid off counter is set to “1”. (S1704).

  On the other hand, if the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is the same as the value of the left door on / off counter 723g (S1701: Yes) as a result of confirmation by the processing of S1701, the process proceeds to S1703 and the value of the solenoid off counter is reached. Is set to “0”.

  When the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is set by the processing of S1703 and S1704, this solenoid off counter setting processing is terminated, and the process returns to the door solenoid control data output processing. Therefore, according to this solenoid off counter setting process, the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is set according to the values of the right door on / off counter 723f and the left door on / off counter 723g.

  Returning again to FIG. If the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S1607 (S1607: Yes), the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is updated (S1618). Specifically, the value of the solenoid-off counter 723d is updated from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”. Then, after the process of S1618, the process proceeds to S1610.

  Therefore, according to the processing of S1607 to S1609 and S1618, when the solenoid-off counter activation flag 723e is first detected, the values of the right door on-off counter 723f and the left door on-off counter 723g are set by the solenoid off counter setting processing. Accordingly, the initial value of solenoid off counter 723d is set. Thereafter, while the solenoid off counter activation flag 723e is on, it is the execution interval of the main process executed by the display control device 505 every time the solenoid control data output process is activated, that is, in this embodiment. Every 2 ms, the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is sequentially updated in the range of 0-1.

  After execution of the solenoid off counter setting process (S1609) described above or after the process of S1618, the value-th data of the solenoid off counter 723d is read as door solenoid output off data 722a1 from the door solenoid output off table 722a (S1610). ). Specifically, data stored at an address corresponding to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is read as door solenoid output off data 722a1.

  Next, the logical product of the door solenoid output off data 722a1 read out in the processing of S1610 and the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c is calculated, and the result is stored in the solenoid control data memory 723c (S1611). The value stored in 723c is output to the output port 728 (S1612), and this door solenoid control data output process is terminated.

  When the value (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 723c is output to the output port 728 by the processing of S1612, according to the values of the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the output solenoid control data, The right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are turned on or off, respectively.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S1606, if the number of open flags that are turned on is equal to or less than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, “1”), that is, the number of open flags that are turned on is If it is confirmed that the number is less than or equal to the number assigned in advance to the display control device 505 according to the power capacity of 612 (S1606: Yes), in that case, the control by the solenoid-off counter 723d is unnecessary. Therefore, the solenoid off counter activation flag is turned off (S1617), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  Therefore, in S1606, it is confirmed that the number of open flags that are turned on is the number of solenoids that is equal to or less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed for the display control device 505 according to the power capacity. In the case of S1601, S1602, S1604, S1613, and S1615, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c set according to the situation of the right door opening flag 723a and the left door opening flag 723b is output to the output port 728. . In this case, if the opening flags (the right door opening flag 723a and the left door opening flag 723b) are ON, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c in which “1” is set in the corresponding bit is the door solenoid control data output. Each time the process is started (every 2 ms in the present embodiment), it is output to the output port 728. On the other hand, if the opening flags (the right door opening flag 723a and the left door opening flag 723b) are OFF, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c in which “0” is set in the corresponding bit is the door solenoid control data output. Each time the process is started (every 2 ms in the present embodiment), it is output to the output port 728. Specifically, for example, during the period when only the right door opening flag 723a among the opening flags is on, the solenoid whose 0th bit is “1” every time the door solenoid control data output process is activated. The value of the control data memory 723c is output to the output port 728. As a result, the excitation current is continuously supplied to the right door solenoid 177.

  On the other hand, in S1606, it is confirmed that the number of open flags that are turned on exceeds the number of solenoids that are less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed for the display control device 505 according to the power capacity. In this case, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c output to the output port 728 by the processing of S1612 is the door solenoid output off data 722a1 corresponding to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d and the right door opening flag in S1611. This is obtained based on the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c set by the processing of S1601, S1602, S1604, S1613, and S1615 according to the value indicated by 723a or the left door opening flag 723b (by logical product). .

  Therefore, for example, even if “1” is set in the 0th bit of the solenoid control data memory 723c in the processing of S1613 due to the right door opening flag 723a being turned on, the value of the solenoid off counter 723d Is “0”, the value of the 0th bit 722a2 of the solenoid output off data 722a1 is “0”. As a result of logical product of these values in the processing of S1611, the value is output to the output port 728. The 0th bit of the solenoid control data memory 723c is “0” (by the processing of S1612). Therefore, even if the right door opening flag 723a indicates ON and the right door 171 is open, if the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is “1”, the right door solenoid 177 is in a non-excited state. .

  As described above, since the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is updated every 2 ms, when the right door opening flag 723a indicates ON, the excitation period of 2 ms and the non-excitation period of 2 ms are set as one cycle. An intermittent excitation current, that is, an excitation current having an energization rate of 50 (= (1/2) × 100)% is applied to the right door solenoid 177. When an intermittent excitation current in which the excitation period (2 ms) and the non-excitation period (2 ms) are repeated as described above, the right door 171 is closed even if the excitation current is cut off during the non-excitation period. Without being done, it remains open until the right door opening flag 723a is turned off. On the other hand, the application (energization) of the excitation current to the left door solenoid 184 is the same as the application (energization) of the excitation current to the right door solenoid 177 described above.

  In this embodiment, the excitation period and the non-excitation time for each solenoid are set to 2 ms, which is equal to the execution interval of the main process executed by the display control device 505, but the solenoid control data output process is performed for a predetermined time. It is assumed that the timer interrupt process is started every time, and the timer interrupt process may be started at intervals shorter than 2 ms (for example, 1 ms, 500 μs, 100 μs, etc.). In this case, for example, if the interval between timer interruptions is 500 μs, each solenoid is energized with an excitation current (energization rate = 50%) having an excitation period of 500 μs and a non-excitation period of 500 μs as one cycle. Will be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 70, solenoid control data output processing (see FIG. 61) executed by main controller 561 and door solenoid control data output processing (see FIG. 68) executed by display controller 505. A description will be given of switching of the large opening opening solenoid 581, the right door solenoid 177, and the left door solenoid 184 between ON (excitation) and OFF (non-excitation). FIG. 70 is a timing chart of turning on and off various solenoids in the present embodiment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, the right door 171 is always open, that is, the right door open flag 723a is always on, and the left door open flag 723b is turned on from the left end of the timing chart. Until the time T2 is reached, the exciting current is continuously supplied to the right door solenoid 177.

  When the left door opening flag 723b is turned on at the timing of T2, all the members (right door 171 and left door 172) that are moved by the solenoid are opened. As a result, when it is necessary to energize more than 1 solenoid, the display controller 505 sets the initial value of the solenoid off counter 723 by the solenoid off counter setting process (see FIG. 69). At the same time, energization control of the excitation current to the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 according to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d by the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68) is started.

  Specifically, when it is detected that the left door opening flag 723b is turned on at the timing of T2, the display control device 505 executes it because the opening flags 273a and 273b corresponding to the two solenoids 177 and 184 are turned on. In the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68), the solenoid-off counter 723d is activated (see FIG. 68). As a result, energization control to the solenoid according to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is started.

  At that time, the solenoid-off counter 723d is set to a value that gives a non-excitation period to the right door solenoid 177 that drives the right door 171 that has been opened earlier, that is, “0”. Therefore, at the timing of T2 when the ON of the left door opening flag 723b is detected, output of the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c whose first bit is “1” is started. Thereby, opening of the left door 172 is started.

  After T2, the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 are set in accordance with the value (“0” or “1”) of the solenoid off counter 723d updated at each execution of the door solenoid control data output process activated at intervals of 2 ms. The energization (on) and energization interruption (off) of the periodic excitation current are started. That is, according to the value of the solenoid off counter 723d updated every 2 ms, the right door solenoid 177 is turned off while the left door solenoid 184 is turned on during the 2 ms period when the value is “0”. . Further, during the period of 2 ms in which the value of the solenoid off counter 723d is “1”, the right door solenoid 177 is turned on, while the left door solenoid 184 is turned off. As a result, an intermittent excitation current is supplied to each of the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184, with an excitation period of 2 ms and an energization cut-off period of 2 ms as one cycle. While the intermittent excitation current is applied to the right door solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are open, that is, in an open state (open state). Kept.

  Note that the left door solenoid 184 is always off until the timing of T2 is reached, because this is because the left door opening flag 723b is off during this period. Therefore, during this period, the left door 172 is always closed (closed state).

  On the other hand, when it is detected that the large opening opening flag 703b is turned on at the timing of T1, the 0th bit is “1” as a result of the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 61) executed by the main controller 561. "Is started, and as a result, energization of the excitation current to the large opening solenoid 581 is started. After T1, the exciting current continues to be supplied to the large opening solenoid 581 so that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is open, that is, opened (open). Kept.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the display control device 505, the solenoid off counter 723d is updated every 2 ms, the energization rate is 50%, and two solenoids (right door solenoid 177 and left door solenoid 184) are used. As a result, the maximum number of solenoids energized at the same time is one. However, the number of solenoids controlled by the solenoid off counter 723d is not limited to three, and the number of solenoids that can be controlled by increasing the number counted by the solenoid off counter 723d and changing the energization rate. It is possible to increase or decrease the number of.

For example, if the number of solenoids to be controlled is S, the maximum number of solenoids that can be driven by the control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply device 612, that is, the maximum consumption that the total current consumption by driving is allowed by the power supply capacity the solenoids which the current amount or less (less than or) when the _{S 1} is solenoid oFF counter 703d, "n (S-1)" the values counted by 723d from "0" (n is 1 The total current consumption of various numbers of solenoids can be controlled by setting the energization rate to each solenoid to (S ₁ / S) × 100%.

In this case, for each value indicated by the solenoid off counter 723d, the output off data 722a1 is configured so that the energization of the excitation current is cut off to (S−S ₁ ) solenoids (that is, in the corresponding bit). By storing “0”, the number of solenoids energized with the excitation current corresponds to each value so that it is less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612. It is possible to control energization (ON) and energization interruption (OFF) of the excitation current to the attached solenoid. Further, in the door solenoid output off data 722a1, for one solenoid, S ₁ consecutive values among the values indicated by the solenoid off counter 723d (however, the maximum value in the solenoid off counter 723d → the minimum value (this embodiment) In the embodiment, it is assumed that “0”) is also continuous), and an excitation current is applied to the solenoid (that is, “1” is stored in the corresponding bit). For (S−S ₁ ) values (however, the maximum value in the solenoid-off counter 723d → the minimum value (“0” in this embodiment) is assumed to be continuous)) By configuring the data so that the energization of the excitation current to the solenoid is cut off (that is, “0” is stored in the corresponding bit), each solenoid is , It is possible to energize the intermittent excitation current in _{(S 1 / S) × 100} % duty factor. Therefore, the output off data 722a (or the output off table 722a) is configured as described above, and the solenoid is driven by energizing the intermittent excitation current with the energization rate of (S ₁ / S) × 100%. (In this embodiment, for example, the right door 171 driven by the right door solenoid 177) is kept open, and the total current consumption is less than or equal to the amount allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612 (or Less than).

  Since each door solenoid output off table 722a is 1 byte of data, only 8 solenoids can be managed for each value of the solenoid off counter 723d. By configuring, the number of solenoids that can be managed can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of solenoids controlled by the main controller 561 is only the large opening solenoid 581, it is not necessary to perform control by the solenoid-off counter 723 d as performed in the display controller 505. . However, when the number of solenoids controlled by the main controller 561 increases, the door solenoid control data output process (FIG. 68) executed by the display controller 505 in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 61). The control process of the total current consumption using the solenoid off counter similar to the above may be executed. In this case, for example, the main control device 561 and the display so that the total current consumed by driving the solenoid in the entire pachinko machine 10 does not exceed the amount allowed by the power supply capacity of the control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply device 612. For each control device such as the control device 505, the number of solenoids that are equal to or less than (or less than) the allowable current consumption is defined in advance. In each control device, when it is necessary to drive more solenoids than that number, intermittent energization of an excitation current is performed using a solenoid-off counter provided in each control device.

  Therefore, as described above, by controlling the total current consumption amount energized to the solenoid, the power supply device 612 can be diverted without having to make a design change, and the power supply device 12 is provided on the inner frame 13. If so, the inner frame 13 can be used. In addition, it is possible to attach different types (models) of game boards 16 without unnecessarily increasing the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612.

  Further, as described above, even when the excitation current is periodically turned on and off in order to control the total current consumption with respect to the solenoids 177 and 184, the solenoids 177 and 184 correspond to the solenoids 177 and 184, respectively. The right door 171 and the left door 172 are held open. Therefore, by controlling the total current consumption amount using the solenoid off counter 723d, it is possible to simultaneously drive the member by the solenoid and control the total current consumption amount by the solenoid.

  Furthermore, since control is performed by one-way communication from the main control device 561 to the display control device 505 between the main control device 561 and the display control device 505, the main control device 561 is controlled by the display control device 505. The drive status of the solenoids 177 and 184 to be operated cannot be known. Accordingly, the total amount of current consumed to energize the solenoids (in this embodiment, the large opening solenoid 581, the right door solenoid 177, and the left door solenoid 184) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is determined by the power supply device 612. The solenoid controlled by the display control device 505 when it is detected that the maximum current consumption allowed for the entire 10 is exceeded (or more) (in this embodiment, the right door solenoid 177, the left The excitation current is controlled as described above for the door solenoid 184). Thereby, for the entire pachinko machine 10, the total current consumption amount due to the solenoid drive is controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum current consumption amount permitted for the entire pachinko machine 10 based on the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612. Can do.

  In this case, in the door solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 68) of the above-described embodiment, the number of open flags that are turned on is allowed for the display control device 505 according to the power capacity by the process of S1606. When it is confirmed that the number of solenoids that are less than (or less than) the consumed current amount is exceeded, the value of the right door on / off counter 723f is compared with the value of the left door on / off counter 723g, For the solenoid corresponding to the on / off counter (the right door solenoid 177 or the left door solenoid 184), a value of the solenoid off counter 723d is set so that the energization cutoff period is first set. That is, an energization cut-off period is provided for the solenoid that has been energized first. Therefore, the total amount of current consumed to energize the solenoids (in this embodiment, the large opening solenoid 581, the right door solenoid 177, and the left door solenoid 184) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply board 612. Even if the maximum current consumption exceeds (or above) the maximum current consumption, the total current consumption is allowed according to the power supply capacity while starting energization to the solenoid that should be newly energized. It can be controlled below (or below) the current. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member (the right door 171 or the left door 172) is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  In the first embodiment, the right current solenoid 177 and the left door solenoid 184 controlled by the display control device 505 are equal to or less than the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid assigned to the display control device 505 (or It is configured to supply an intermittent excitation current depending on whether or not. Also for the main control device 561, when the number of solenoids to be controlled increases and exceeds the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid assigned to the main control device 561 (or more), the door solenoid described above. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a control-data output process may be performed. In that case, the RAM 703 of the main controller 561 is provided with a solenoid off counter having the same function as the solenoid off counter 723d and a solenoid off counter starting flag having the same function as the solenoid off counter starting flag 723e. What is necessary is just to comprise. At that time, the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid assigned to the main control device 561, the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid assigned to the display control device 505, and other values if necessary. The sum total with the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid assigned to the control device (for example, the payout discharge control device 711) is equal to or less than (or less than) the power supply capacity allowed to be supplied by the power supply device 612. With this configuration, it is possible to control the total current consumption amount energized to the solenoid in the entire pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 79. In the first embodiment described above, the display control device 505 is provided with the solenoid-off counter 723d, and the solenoids (the right door solenoid 177 and the right door solenoid 177 and the left door 172) that are provided in the display device 505 are provided. By controlling the total amount of current consumed by driving the left door solenoid 184), the total amount of current consumed by driving the solenoid in the entire pachinko machine 10 is less than or equal to the amount allowed to be supplied by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612 (or Less). Instead, in the second embodiment, the main controller 561 controls the total current consumption that is energized to each solenoid in order to drive a plurality of tulips provided in order to improve game play. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a front view of the game board 16 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, the game board 16 used in the second embodiment has a base plate 60 having a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and rails 61 and 62 for guiding game balls, a general winning opening 63 and the like. Is assembled in the same manner as the game board of the first embodiment described above, and a normal symbol A display device 901 composed of 7-segment LEDs and a decorative symbol display device 902 composed of an LCD (liquid crystal display) are assembled. ing.

  Also in the game board 16 in the second embodiment, similarly to the game board 16 in the first embodiment, a game area in which a game is played is formed on the front surface by the behavior of the game ball. A variable display unit 910 having a normal symbol A display device 901 and a decorative symbol display device 902 is disposed at the center of the game area. The variable display unit 910 is controlled by the display control device 505. Here, the decorative symbol display device 902 is a device that displays a decorative symbol for enhancing performance according to the gaming state during the game.

  The normal symbol A display device 901 is a device that displays the lottery result of the first lottery, which is a lottery executed by the main control device 561, triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first entrance 905 as a symbol. . For example, in the normal symbol A display device 901, when the first lottery is won, a predetermined number is displayed by a 7-segment LED.

  The first entrance 905 is a gate-shaped entrance that allows game balls to enter as in the first entrance 64 of the first embodiment. When a game ball enters the first entrance 905, a first entrance switch 524 (see FIG. 30) provided on the back side of the game board 16 is also provided, as in the case of the first embodiment. When turned on, the normal symbol A display device 901 starts symbol variation display.

  The number of times that the game ball passes to the first entrance 905 can be held up to 4 times. Here, four holding lamps 911 are provided below the normal symbol A display device 901. An LED lamp (not shown) is disposed on the back side of each holding lamp 911. The number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of holding times is turned on and off in a predetermined order, so that the holding lamp 911 is set to the number of holding times. The corresponding number is lit up.

  On the right side of the variable display unit 910, there are arranged three winning holes A921, a winning hole B922, and a winning hole C923 in the vertical direction. Among these, the winning hole A921 located at the top is able to enter the winning ball A921 when winning the first lottery that is triggered by the entering of the gaming ball into the first ball opening 905. Thus, the upper tulip 921a provided in the opening is configured to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds) per winning. Note that the upper tulip 921a is opened and closed by energizing and de-energizing the upper tulip solenoid 931 (see FIG. 72). When the game ball passes the winning opening A921 while the upper tulip 921a is being opened, the second lottery is executed by the main controller 561 using the passage as a trigger.

  A normal symbol B display device 925 and a holding lamp 926 are provided to the right of the winning opening A921. The normal symbol B display device 925 is a device that displays the lottery result of the second lottery executed when the game ball enters the winning hole A921 while the upper tulip 921a is open as described above, and is provided on the back side. The lottery result of the second lottery is displayed by turning on a plurality of (not shown) LED lamps (for example, four) LED lamps (for example, three color LED lamps). For example, in the normal symbol B display device 925, when the second lottery is won, four LED lamps are lit in the same predetermined color. Note that the inside of the normal symbol B display device 925 is partitioned into a number corresponding to the number of LED lamps, and the light of each LED lamp can be distinguished and visually recognized.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured such that when a game ball passes the winning opening A921, the number of passages can be held up to four times. Four LED lamps (not shown) are provided on the back side of the holding lamp 926. The number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of holding times is turned on and off in a predetermined order, whereby the holding lamp 926 is held. Only the number corresponding to the number of times is displayed. The holding lamp 926 is divided into a number corresponding to the number of LED lamps, and the lights of the four LED lamps can be individually distinguished and visually recognized.

  The winning hole B922 located below the winning hole A921 is allowed to enter the winning hole B922 when winning the second lottery that is triggered by the entering of the gaming ball into the winning hole A921. In addition, the middle tulip 922a provided in the opening is configured to be opened four times (four rounds) at a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds) per winning. The middle tulip 922a is opened and closed by energizing and shutting off the middle tulip solenoid 932 (see FIG. 72). When the game ball passes the winning opening B922 while the middle tulip 922a is opened, the main controller 561 executes the third lottery with the passage as a trigger.

  A normal symbol C display device 927 and a holding lamp 928 are provided to the right of the winning opening B922. The normal symbol C display device 927 is a device that displays the lottery result of the third lottery executed when the game ball enters the winning hole B922 while the middle tulip 922a is opened as described above, and is provided on the back side. The lottery result of the third lottery is displayed by turning on a plurality of (not shown) LED lamps (for example, four) LED lamps (for example, three color LED lamps). For example, in the normal symbol C display device 927, when the third lottery is won, four LED lamps are lit in the same predetermined color. Note that the inside of the normal symbol C display device 927 is partitioned into a number corresponding to the number of LED lamps, and the light of each LED lamp can be distinguished and visually recognized.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured such that when a game ball passes the winning opening B922, the number of passages can be suspended up to four times. Four LED lamps (not shown) are provided on the back side of the holding lamp 928. The number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of holding times is turned on and off in a predetermined order, whereby the holding lamp 928 is held. Only the number corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Note that the holding lamp 928 is partitioned into a number corresponding to the number of LED lamps, and the lights of the four LED lamps can be individually distinguished and visually recognized.

  The winning opening C923 located below the winning opening B922 will be able to enter a gaming ball into the winning opening C923 when winning the third lottery that is triggered by the entering of the gaming ball into the winning opening B922. In addition, the lower tulip 923a provided in the opening is configured to be opened four times (four rounds) at a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds) per winning. The lower tulip 923a is opened and closed by energizing and interrupting the exciting current to the lower tulip solenoid 933 (see FIG. 72).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with the game board 16 of the second embodiment, the first lottery is performed with the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 905, and when the lottery is won, For each win, the upper tulip 921a provided in the winning opening A921 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). Then, when a game ball enters the winning opening A921 while the upper tulip 921a is being opened, the second lottery is performed with the entrance of the game ball. At this time, if the second lottery is won, the middle tulip 922a provided in the winning opening B922 is opened for four rounds every predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the winning opening B922 while the middle tulip 922a is opened, a third lottery is performed with the entrance of the game ball. At that time, if the third lottery is won, the lower tulip 923a provided in the winning opening C923 opens 4 rounds every predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done. Therefore, the difference in the number of game balls entering the winning opening C923 during the opening of the lower tulip 923a does not significantly affect the number of prize balls to be paid out. On the other hand, after the game ball has entered the first entrance 933, the game ball is entered into the winning entrance A921 even though the upper tulip 921a is opened by winning the first lottery. If it is not possible, the number of winning balls that can be obtained will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the expected value of the winning ball gradually increases depending on whether or not each winning opening (winning opening A921, winning opening B922, winning opening C923) is won. Can arouse a great interest.

  FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment having the game board 16 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933 that drive the upper tulip 921a, the middle tulip 922a, and the lower tulip 923a, respectively, are the main controls. It is connected to the input / output port 705 of the device 561.

  In addition, a solenoid output off table 702a is provided in the ROM 702 of the main controller 561 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The solenoid output off table 702a is turned on (excited) or turned off (de-energized) in the three tulips 921a, 922a, and 923a in association with values counted by a solenoid off counter 703d described later. It is the table which stores the solenoid output off data which shows. The solenoid output off table 702a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the RAM 703 of the main controller 561 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the backup area 703a, the solenoid control data memory 703c, the solenoid off counter 703d, the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e, the upper tulip release flag 703f, A middle tulip opening flag 703g, a lower tulip opening flag 703h, an upper tulip on / off counter 703i, a middle tulip on / off counter 703j, and a lower tulip on / off counter 703k are provided.

  The solenoid off counter 703d is a counter that counts a value for reading the solenoid output off data 702a1 (see FIG. 73A) from the solenoid output off table 702a in the range of “0” to “2”. The value of the solenoid-off counter 703d is set as an initial value by initialization processing of the RAM 703 (see FIG. 53) when backup data is not stored in the backup area 703a when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. 0 "is set. On the other hand, when backup data is stored in the backup area 703a, a value stored as the backup data is set as an initial value. After the initial value is set in the solenoid off counter 703d, every time the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75) is executed at intervals of 2 ms, the value is “0” → “1” → “2” → “0” "→" 1 "→ ... are updated in this order. Although details will be described later, in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75), three tulips 921a are selected according to the value of the solenoid output off data 702a1 read from the solenoid output off table 702a according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d. , 922a and 923a are controlled to be energized (ON) and energized (OFF). As a result, the total current consumption amount energized to the solenoids to be controlled (three tulip solenoids 931, 932, 933) is less than (or less than) the current consumption amount allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612. It is controlled to become.

  The solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is a flag indicating whether or not the control according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is being executed in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75). 75). Specifically, the solenoid-off counter activation flag 703e is a member that is moved by a solenoid controlled by the main controller 561 in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75) (in this embodiment, three tulips 921a, 922a, 923a) is turned on when it is detected that a predetermined number (2 in this embodiment) has been released, while it is detected that the number of members being opened is equal to or less than the predetermined number. When turned off. That is, the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e indicates on during the control according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75), and the value of the solenoid off counter 703d. It is turned off while the control according to is unnecessary.

  The upper tulip opening flag 703f is a flag indicating whether the upper tulip 921a is opened (opened) or closed (closed). The upper tulip release flag 703f is turned on when the first lottery is won, and as a result, the upper tulip 921a is opened. When the predetermined opening time has elapsed, the upper tulip opening flag 703f is turned off, and as a result, the upper tulip 921a is closed.

  The middle tulip opening flag 703g is a flag indicating whether the middle tulip 922a is opened (opened) or closed (closed). The middle tulip release flag 703g is turned on when the second lottery is won, and as a result, the middle tulip 922a is opened. When a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the middle tulip opening flag 703g is turned off, and as a result, the middle tulip 922a is closed.

  The lower tulip opening flag 703h is a flag indicating whether the lower tulip 923a is opened (opened) or closed (closed). The lower tulip release flag 703h is turned on when the third lottery is won, and as a result, the lower tulip 923a is opened. Then, when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the lower tulip opening flag 703h is turned off, and as a result, the lower tulip 923a is closed.

  These release flags 703i, 703j, and 703k are all initialized to OFF by the initialization process (S114 to S116) of the RAM 703 in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the main controller 561. Is done.

  The upper tulip on / off counter 703i, the middle tulip on / off counter 703j, and the lower tulip on / off counter 703k are counters for counting time lengths from the start of opening of the upper tulip 921a, the middle tulip 922a, and the lower tulip 923a, respectively. These on / off counters 703i, 703j, and 703k all have “0” as an initial value.

  Specifically, the upper tulip on / off counter 703i starts counting from “1” when it is first detected that the upper tulip flag 703f is on in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75). Each time the control data output process (see FIG. 75) is started, if the upper tulip release flag 703f is on, the value is sequentially added by one. On the other hand, when it is detected that the upper tulip release flag 703f is off, the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is reset to “0”.

  Similarly to the upper tulip on / off counter 703i, the middle tulip on / off counter 703j and the lower tulip on / off counter 703g also turn on the middle tulip opening flag 703g and the lower tulip opening flag 703h, respectively, in the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75). Is counted sequentially from “1”. When the release flags 703g and 703h indicate OFF, they are reset to “0”.

  On the output side of the output port 728 of the display control device 505 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, instead of the second symbol display device 82, the normal symbol A display device 901, the normal symbol B display device 925, A symbol C display device 927 is connected. Further, instead of the first symbol display device 81, a decorative symbol display device 902 is connected to the output side of the output port 729 of the display control device 505 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment.

  The MPU 721 of the display control device 505 receives the symbol display command transmitted from the main control device 561 in the same manner as the control performed on the first symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 82 in the first embodiment. Based on this, the display contents of the normal symbol A display device 901, the normal symbol B display device 925, the normal symbol C display device 927, and the decorative symbol display device 902 are controlled.

  Next, the solenoid output off table 702a and the solenoid control data memory 703c in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing the solenoid output off table 702a, and FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of data (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c for each bit. .

  In the solenoid output off table 702a, as shown in FIG. 73A, the solenoid output off data 702a1 is associated with each value indicated by the solenoid off counter 703d. More specifically, solenoid output off data 702a1 is stored at an address corresponding to each value indicated by the solenoid off counter 703d. Then, according to the value indicated by the solenoid off counter 703d, the solenoid output off data 702a1 stored in the address corresponding to the value is read.

  Solenoid output off data 702a1 is 1-byte data, and the 0th bit 702a2 is assigned as a bit for storing a value used for instructing excitation (on) or non-excitation (off) of the upper tulip solenoid 931. ing. The first bit 702a3 is assigned as a bit for storing a value used to instruct excitation (ON) or non-excitation (OFF) of the middle tulip solenoid 932, and further, the second bit 702a4 is assigned to the lower stage 702a4. It is assigned as a bit for storing a value used for instructing excitation (ON) or non-excitation (OFF) of the tulip solenoid 933. Depending on the state of each of these bits 702a2 to 702a4 and the corresponding open flags 703f, 703g, and 703h (on or off), the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933, An energization (ON) or energization interruption (OFF) of the excitation current is instructed (see FIG. 75).

  More specifically, when the set value is “0” in each of the bits 702a2 to 702a4, the values of the open flags 703f, 703g, and 703h for the corresponding solenoids 931, 932, and 933 (on or off), respectively. However, if the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is activated (that is, when energization control is performed by the solenoid off counter 703d), the excitation current of the corresponding solenoids 931, 932, 933 is Instructed to turn off the power (off). For example, when the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is activated, if the first bit 702a3 of the solenoid output off data 702a1 read according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is “0”, the middle tulip is released. The middle tulip solenoid 932 is instructed to be de-energized (off) regardless of the value of the flag 703g (on or off).

  On the other hand, if the set value is “1” in each of the bits 702a2 to 702a4, the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is activated (that is, energization control is performed by the solenoid off counter 703d). Further, according to the values (on or off) of the open flags 703f, 703g, and 703h for the corresponding solenoids 931, 932, and 933, energization (on) or energization of the excitation current to the corresponding solenoids 931, 932, and 933, respectively. Shut off (off) is instructed. For example, when the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is on (when the solenoid off counter 723d is activated), the first bit 702a3 of the solenoid output off data 702a1 read according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is “1”. If the middle stage tulip release flag 703g is on, the middle stage tulip solenoid 932 is instructed to be excited (on), and if the middle stage tulip release flag 703g is off, the middle stage tulip solenoid 932g is off. The solenoid 932 is instructed to be de-energized (off). It should be noted that the relationship between the value of the 0th bit 702a2 in the solenoid output off data 702a1 and the excitation (on) or non-excitation (off) of the upper tulip solenoid 931, and the value of the second bit 702a4 and the excitation of the lower tulip solenoid 933 ( The relationship between ON and de-energization (OFF) is the same as the relationship between the value of the first bit 702a3 and the excitation (ON) or de-energization (OFF) of the middle tulip solenoid 932 described above.

  Although details will be described later (see, for example, FIG. 79), the second bit 702a4 of the solenoid output off data 702a1 is “0” even though the lower tulip 923a is open (the lower tulip release flag 703h is on). Therefore, even when the excitation current to the lower tulip solenoid 933 is turned off (off), it is an intermittent excitation in which the conduction rate is (2/3) × 100%. It is the energization cut-off period in the current. Therefore, the lower tulip 923a is kept open (or opened) without being closed. Similarly, for the upper tulip 921a and the middle tulip 922a, the corresponding solenoids 931 and 932 are de-energized (off) according to the value of the solenoid output off data 702a1 even though the corresponding release flags 703f and 703g are on. ), The upper tulip 921a and the middle tulip 922a are kept open (or opened).

  In the solenoid output off table 702a, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), “1” is set to two bits in the 0th to 2nd bits with respect to one value indicated by the solenoid off counter 703d. Is associated with solenoid out / off data 702a1 in which “0” is set. In addition, the solenoid output off data 702a1 corresponding to the values “0” to “2” that can be taken by the solenoid off counter 703d are different in the bits where “0” is set. Therefore, when the solenoid off counter counts as follows: → “0” → “1” → “2” → “0” →…, one of the three solenoids 931, 932, 933 must be Instructed to be non-excited, all three solenoids 931, 932, 933 are not energized at the same time. That is, by using the solenoid-off counter 703d, it is possible to control up to two solenoids that are excited simultaneously.

  The solenoid control data stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c is 1-byte data as shown in FIG. The 0th bit in the 1-byte data is assigned as a bit for storing a value for controlling the driving of the upper tulip solenoid 931, and the first bit is a bit for storing a value for controlling the driving of the middle tulip solenoid 932. The second bit is assigned as a bit for storing a value for controlling the driving of the lower tulip solenoid 933. In each of these 0th to 2nd bits, if the value stored in the bit is “1”, energization (on) of the excitation current to the corresponding solenoids 931, 932, 933 is instructed. On the other hand, if the stored value is “0”, it instructs the corresponding solenoids 931, 932, 933 to cut off the energization current (off).

  When this solenoid control data (value stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c) is output to the input / output port 705 as a result of a solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, Depending on the state, the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933 are independently turned on or off. As a result, the upper tulip 921a, the middle tulip 922a, and the lower tulip 923a are independently opened or closed.

  Specifically, when the 0th bit in the solenoid control data output to the input / output port 705 is “1”, the upper tulip solenoid 931 is excited (turned on), and thus the upper tulip 921a is opened. When the 0th bit is “0”, the upper tulip solenoid 931 is not energized (off). In this case, if the upper tulip opening flag 703f is off, the upper tulip 921a is closed (or remains closed). On the other hand, when the upper tulip release flag 703f is on and the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is activated (that is, energization control is performed by the solenoid off counter 703d), the upper tulip solenoid 931 is applied. Since it corresponds to a non-excitation period in energization with an energization rate (2/3) × 100% intermittent excitation current (see, for example, FIG. 79), the upper tulip 921a is kept open without being closed. (Or open).

  Similarly, when the first bit and / or the second bit in the solenoid control data output to the input / output port 705 is “1”, the middle tulip solenoid 932 and / or the lower tulip solenoid 933 are excited ( On), the middle tulip 922a and / or the lower tulip 923a is opened. When the first bit and / or the second bit is “0”, the middle tulip 922a and / or the lower tulip 923a is not energized (off). In this case, if the release flags 703g and 703h are off, the corresponding middle tulip 922a and lower tulip 923a are closed (or remain closed). On the other hand, when the middle tulip release flag 703g and / or the lower tulip release flag 703h is on and the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is activated (that is, energization control is performed by the solenoid off counter 703d). This corresponds to a non-excitation period in energization with an intermittent excitation current of (2/3) × 100% applied to the middle tulip solenoid 932 and / or the lower tulip solenoid 933 (see, for example, FIG. 79). The middle tulip 922a and / or the lower tulip 923a is kept open (or opened) without closing.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the main controller 561 in the second embodiment. The timer interrupt process of the second embodiment is also executed every 2 ms, for example, as in the first embodiment.

  In the timer interruption process of the second embodiment, after executing the processes of S601 to S604 similar to those of the first embodiment, the second lottery process (S606) is performed, and the third lottery process (S607) is performed. After execution of the third lottery process, a solenoid control data output process (S605) is performed. The solenoid control data output process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. After the solenoid control data output process, the MPU 701 once ends this timer interrupt process.

  In the start winning process (S604) in the timer interruption process of the second embodiment, the process of S704 in FIG. 60 corresponds to the first lottery performed when the game ball passes through the first entrance 905. . In the second embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area by the processing of S704 is a value indicating winning, as a result, the same holding ball is stored in the normal symbol A display device 901. A symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the area is displayed. At that time, the decorative symbol display device 902 displays symbols corresponding to the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

  In order to execute the second lottery process (S606), the RAM 703 according to the second embodiment sets a random number counter for the second lottery and an initial value of the random number counter for the second lottery for determining the winning of the second lottery. 2 is provided with a second lottery random number initial value counter (not shown). The structures and functions of the second lottery random number counter and the second lottery random number initial value counter correspond to the big hit random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI, respectively. The updated values of these counters are appropriately stored in a second counter buffer (not shown) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 703 as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI (see FIG. 52). Stored. Note that the value of the random number counter per second lottery is updated together with the update of the big hit random number counter C1 and the like in S603 in the timer interruption process shown in FIG. In addition, the value of the second lottery random number initial value counter is updated together with the update of the random number initial value counter CINI in S209 in the normal process (see FIG. 77). Then, in the RAM 703, as in the reserved ball number storage area shown in FIG. 52, a second hold composed of one second execution area and four second hold areas (second hold first to fourth areas). A ball storage area is provided, and the value of the random number counter per second lottery is stored in accordance with the winning timing to the winning opening A921.

  The second lottery process (S606) will be specifically described. The same process as the start winning process (FIG. 60) is performed. First, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has won a winning opening A921. It is to be noted that the winning of the game ball to the winning opening A921 is detected when an unillustrated operation opening switch provided at a predetermined position in the winning opening A921 is turned on. When a game ball is won at the winning opening A921, it is determined whether or not the number N ′ of the action-suspended balls of the normal symbol B display device 926 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). As a result, if there is a winning at the winning opening A921 and the number of the operation-reserved balls N ′ <4, the number of the operation-reserved balls N ′ is incremented by 1, and the first updated in S603 as described above. The value of the random number counter per two lotteries is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703. On the other hand, if there is no winning in the winning opening A921, or if there is a winning in the winning opening A921, and the number of operation pending balls N '<4, the second lottery process is terminated.

  Further, in order to execute the third lottery process (S607), the RAM 703 in the second embodiment has a random number counter per third lottery for determining the winning of the third lottery and the initial random number counter per third lottery. A third lottery random number initial value counter used for value setting is provided (not shown). The structures and functions of the third lottery random number counter and the third lottery random number initial value counter correspond to the big lot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI, respectively. The updated values of these counters are appropriately stored in a third counter buffer (not shown) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 703 as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI (see FIG. 52). Stored. Note that the value of the random number counter per third lottery is updated together with the update of the big hit random number counter C1 and the like in S603 in the timer interruption process shown in FIG. In addition, the value of the third lottery random number initial value counter is updated together with the update of the random number initial value counter CINI in S209 in the normal process (see FIG. 77). Then, in the RAM 703, as in the reserved ball number storage area shown in FIG. 52, a third hold composed of one third execution area and four third hold areas (third hold first to fourth areas). A ball storage area is provided, and the value of the random number counter per third lottery is stored in accordance with the winning timing to the winning opening B922.

  The third lottery process (S607) will be described in detail. The same process as the start winning process (FIG. 60) is performed. First, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has won a prize opening B922. Note that the winning of a game ball to the winning opening B922 is detected by turning on an unillustrated operation port switch provided at a predetermined position in the winning opening B922. When a game ball is won at the winning opening B922, it is determined whether or not the number N ″ of operation-reserved balls of the normal symbol C display device 928 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If there is a winning at the winning opening B922 and the number of active balls to be held N ″ <4, the number of operating balls to be held N ″ is incremented by 1 and the third lottery updated in S603 as described above. The value of the random number counter is stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 703. On the other hand, even if there is no winning at the winning opening B922 or there is a winning at the winning opening B922, it operates. If the number of retained balls N "<4, the third lottery process is terminated.

  Next, the solenoid control data output process (S607) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the solenoid control data output process of the second embodiment, first, the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c is cleared (S1901). That is, “0” is set to all the bits constituting the solenoid control data memory 703c (see FIG. 73B).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the upper tulip release flag 703f is on (S1902). If it is off (S1902: No), the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is reset to “0” (S1903). Transition to processing. On the other hand, if the upper tulip release flag 703f is on (S1902: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1902, “1” is set to the 0th bit of the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c (S1915). Then, the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is incremented by 1 (S1916), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  In this solenoid control data output processing by the processing of S1901 to S1903 and S1915 to S1916, when the upper tulip opening flag 703f is off, that is, while the upper tulip 921a is closed, the upper tulip on / off counter 703i. Is set to “0”, but once the upper tulip opening flag 703f indicates ON, that is, when the opening of the upper tulip 921a is started, the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is incremented by 1 to “1”. "Is set. Thereafter, while the upper tulip release flag 703f is turned on, the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is incremented by 1 every time the solenoid control data output process is started, that is, every 2 ms in the present embodiment. When the state of the upper tulip 921a shifts from open to closed, that is, when the upper tulip release flag 703f is detected to be off, the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is reset to “0”. Therefore, the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i indicates a measure of the time during which the upper tulip 921a is open.

  Next, in the processing of S1904, it is confirmed whether the middle tulip release flag 703g is on. In this case, if it is off (S1904: No), the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is reset to “0” (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906. On the other hand, if the middle tulip release flag 703g is on (S1904: Yes) as a result of confirmation by the processing of S1904, “1” is set to the first bit of the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c (S1917), and then Then, the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is incremented by 1 (S1918), and the process proceeds to S1906.

  As in the case of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i described above, the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j also indicates the length of time that the middle tulip 922a is opened by the processing of S1901, S1904 to S1905, and S1917 to S1918. .

  Next, in the processing of S1906, it is confirmed whether or not the lower tulip release flag 703h is on. In this case, if it is off (S1906: No), the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k is reset to “0” (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. On the other hand, if the lower tulip release flag 703h is on (S1906: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1906, “1” is set to the second bit of the solenoid control data memory 703c (S1919), and then Then, the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k is incremented by 1 (S1920), and the process proceeds to S1908.

  As in the case of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i described above, the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k also indicates the length of time that the lower tulip 923a is opened by the processing of S1901, S1906 to S1907, and S1919 to S1920. .

  Therefore, by comparing the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i, the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j, and the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k, the opening order of the upper tulip 921a, the middle tulip 922a, and the lower tulip 923a is opened. Can know.

  Next, in the processing of S1908, among the release flags controlled by the main controller 561 (in this embodiment, the upper tulip release flag 703f, the middle tulip release flag 703g, and the lower tulip release flag 703h) that are turned on. It is confirmed whether or not the number of flags is a predetermined number or less (in this embodiment, 2 or less). The predetermined number used as the determination criterion in the processing of S1908 is a number assigned in advance to the main control device 561 according to the power supply capacity of the control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply device 612. Specifically, the amount of current consumed by driving is the number of solenoids that is equal to or less than (or less than) the amount allowed for the main controller 561 according to the power supply capacity. In the present embodiment, as an example The number is assumed to be “2”. On the other hand, similarly to the above-described main control device 561, the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid corresponding to the power supply capacity is assigned to other control devices such as the display control device 505, and The sum of the maximum current consumption for driving the solenoid allocated to the control board is configured to be less than (or less than) the amount allowed by the power supply capacity.

  As a result of checking in the processing of S1908, if the number of open flags that are turned on exceeds a predetermined number (“2” in the present embodiment) (S1908: No), the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is turned on. (S1909). At this time, if it is confirmed that the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is off (S1909: Yes), the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e, which is a flag indicating that control by the solenoid off counter 703d is being executed. Is turned on (S1910). Next, a solenoid off counter setting process for setting the initial value of the solenoid off counter 703d is executed (S1911). The solenoid-off counter setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. And after the process of S1911, it transfers to the process of S1912.

  Here, the solenoid-off counter setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the solenoid off counter setting process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k is the largest among the three on / off counters 703i, 703j, and 703k (S2001), and the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k is the largest. If larger (S2001: Yes), the value of the solenoid-off counter 703d is set to “2” (S2002). Note that the state “the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k is the largest” confirmed in the process of S2001 is when the lower tulip on / off counter 703k has the maximum value among the three on / off counters 703i, 703j, and 703k. Of course, the case where the three on / off counters 703i, 703j, and 703k all have the same value is also included. Furthermore, a case where one of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j or the upper tulip on / off counter 703i has a value equal to that of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k and is larger than the value of the other tulip on / off counter is also included. Therefore, even when there is an on / off counter having the same value as the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k, the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k is preferentially regarded as a large value.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2001, when the other on / off counters 703i and 703j are larger than the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k (S2001: No), the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is the largest. Whether the value is an on / off counter is checked (S2003). If the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is the largest as a result of the confirmation in S2003 (S2003: Yes), the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set to “1” (S2004).

  The state “the value of the middle stage tulip on / off counter 703j is the largest” confirmed in the process of S2003 is the case where the middle stage tulip on / off counter 703j alone has the maximum value among the three on / off counters 703i, 703j, and 703k. Of course, the case where the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is equal to the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i, which is larger than the value of the lower tulip on / off counter 703k, is also included. Therefore, even if the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is the same as the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i, the value of the middle tulip on / off counter 703j is preferentially regarded as a large value.

  On the other hand, when the value of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i is the largest as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2003 (S2003: No), the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set to “0” (S2005).

  When the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set by the processes of S2002, S2004, and S2005, the solenoid off counter setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the solenoid control data output process. Therefore, according to the solenoid off counter setting process, the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set according to the values of the upper tulip on / off counter 703i, the middle tulip on / off counter 703j, and the lower tulip on / off counter 703k. As will be described in detail later, as a result of setting the value of the solenoid off counter 703d by this solenoid off counter setting process, excitation to the solenoids 931, 932, and 933 corresponding to the tulips 921a, 922a, and 923a that have been opened earliest The energization of current is interrupted for 2 ms, and thereafter, intermittent excitation currents corresponding to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d are energized to the solenoids 931, 932, 933. Further, in this solenoid off counter setting process, when there are a plurality of tulips that have been opened from the earliest, the energization of the excitation current to the lower tulip 923a that hardly influences the game is preferentially cut off for 2 ms. The value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set.

  Returning again to FIG. If the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S1909 (S1909: Yes), the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is updated (S1922). Specifically, the value of the solenoid-off counter 703d is updated from “0” to “1”, from “1” to “2”, or from “2” to “0”. Then, after the process of S1622, the process proceeds to S1612.

  Therefore, according to the processing of S1909 to S1911, S1922, when the solenoid-off counter activation flag 703e is first detected, the upper tulip on-off counter 703i, the middle tulip on-off counter 703j, and the lower tulip are detected by the solenoid off counter setting processing. The initial value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set according to the value of the on / off counter 703k. Thereafter, while the solenoid off counter activation flag 703e is on, every time the solenoid control data output process is activated, that is, every 2 ms in the present embodiment, the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is 0-2. Sequentially updated in the range.

  After execution of the solenoid off counter setting process (S1911) described above or after the process of S1922, the value-th data of the solenoid off counter 703d is read as solenoid output off data 702a1 from the solenoid output off table 702a (S1912). Specifically, data stored at an address corresponding to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is read as solenoid output off data 702a1.

  Next, a logical product of the solenoid output off data 702a1 read out in the process of S1912 and the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c is calculated, and the result is stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c (S1913), and the solenoid control data memory 703c. Is output to the input / output port 705 (S1914), and the solenoid control data output process is terminated.

  When the value (solenoid control data) stored in the solenoid control data memory 703c is output to the input / output port 705 by the processing of S1914, each of the values corresponding to the 0th to 2nd bits of the output solenoid control data The upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933 are turned on or off.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S1908, when the number of open flags that are turned on is equal to or less than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, “2”), that is, the number of open flags that are turned on is If it is confirmed that the number is less than or equal to the number previously assigned to the main control device 561 according to the power supply capacity of 612 (S1908: Yes), control by the solenoid-off counter 703d is unnecessary in that case. Therefore, the solenoid off counter activation flag is turned off (S1921), and the process proceeds to S1914.

  Therefore, in S1908, it is confirmed that the number of open flags that are turned on is the number of solenoids that are equal to or less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed for the main controller 561 according to the power supply capacity. In the case of S1901, S1902, S1904, S1906, S1915, S1917, S1919, the solenoid control data memory 703c is set according to the status of the release flags 703f, 703g, 703h corresponding to the tulips 921a, 922a, 923a. Is output to the input / output port 705. In this case, if the release flag (upper tulip release flag 703f, middle tulip release flag 703g, lower tulip release flag 703h) is on, the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c in which “1” is set in the corresponding bit is set. Each time the solenoid control data output process is activated (in this embodiment, every 2 ms), the data is output to the input / output port 705. On the other hand, if the release flag (upper tulip release flag 703f, middle tulip release flag 703g, lower tulip release flag 703h) is off, the value of the solenoid control data memory 723c in which the corresponding bit is set to “0” is Each time the solenoid control data output process is started (in this embodiment, every 2 ms), the data is output to the input / output port 705. Specifically, for example, during the period when two release flags of the upper stage tulip release flag 703f and the middle stage tulip release flag 703g are turned on among the release flags, each time the solenoid control data output process is activated, 0 is displayed. The value of the solenoid control data memory 703c in which the bit is “1” and the first bit is “1” is output to the input / output port 705. As a result, the excitation current is supplied to the upper tulip 931 and the middle tulip 932. Is energized continuously.

  On the other hand, in S1908, it is confirmed that the number of open flags that are turned on exceeds the number of solenoids that are less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed for the main controller 561 according to the power capacity. In this case, the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c output to the input / output port 705 by the processing of S1914 is the solenoid output off data 702a1 corresponding to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d, the release flag 703f, It is obtained by taking the logical product with the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c set by the processing of S1901, S1902, S1904, S1906, S1915, S1917, and S1919 according to the values indicated by 703g and 703h.

  Therefore, for example, even if “1” is set in the first bit of the solenoid control data memory 703c in the processing of S1917 because the middle tulip release flag 703g indicates on, the value of the solenoid off counter 703d Is “1”, the value of the first bit 702a3 of the solenoid output off data 702a1 is “0”. Therefore, the logical product of these values is obtained in the processing of S1913, and the result is output to the output port 705. The first bit of the solenoid control data memory 703c is “0” (by the process of S1914). Therefore, even if the middle tulip opening flag 703g indicates ON and the middle tulip 922a is open, if the value of the solenoid-off counter 703d is “1”, the middle tulip solenoid 932 is in a non-excited state. .

  As described above, since the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is updated every 2 ms, the middle tulip release flag 703g is turned on, and when the control by the solenoid off counter 703d is performed, the excitation period of 4 ms and the 2 ms An intermittent excitation current having a non-excitation period as one cycle, that is, an excitation current having an energization rate of (2/3) × 100%, is applied to the middle tulip solenoid 932. As described above, when an intermittent excitation current in which the excitation period (4 ms) and the non-excitation period (2 ms) are repeated is applied, the middle tulip 922a is closed even if the excitation current is interrupted during the non-excitation period. Without opening, the middle tulip opening flag 703g is kept open until it is turned off. On the other hand, the application (energization) of the excitation current to the upper tulip solenoid 931 and the lower tulip solenoid 933 is the same as the application (energization) of the excitation current to the middle tulip solenoid 932 described above.

  Accordingly, as a result of the execution of the solenoid control data output process, the number of solenoids that are equal to or less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed for the main controller 561 according to the power supply capacity of the power supply board 12 is supported. When the number of movable members (upper tulip 921a, middle tulip 922a, and lower tulip 923a) are in an open state, each solenoid 931, 932, 933 has an excitation period of 4 ms and a non-excitation period of 2 ms. An intermittent exciting current having a period is energized. At that time, since one solenoid is always turned off by the solenoid-off counter 703d, it can be controlled not to exceed the power supply capacity by driving the solenoid. Therefore, not only can the power supply device 612 be diverted without changing the design of the power supply device 612, but the inner frame 13 can be diverted when the power supply device 12 is provided in the inner frame 13. In addition, it is possible to attach different types (models) of game boards 16 to the divertable inner frame 13 without unnecessarily increasing the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612.

  It should be noted that solenoids that are supplied with intermittent excitation current having an excitation period of 4 ms and a non-excitation period of 2 ms as one cycle (in this embodiment, upper tulip solenoid 931, middle tulip solenoid 932, lower tulip solenoid 933). While such intermittent energization is continued, a member corresponding to the energized solenoid (in this embodiment, upper tulip 921a, middle tulip 922a, lower tulip 923a) is opened (open state) ). Therefore, the driving of the member by the solenoid and the control of the total current consumption amount by the solenoid can be realized at the same time.

  In the second embodiment, the excitation period (energization period) is 4 ms and the non-excitation period is 2 ms. However, the values of the excitation period and the non-excitation period are not limited to these values. For example, intermittent energization (energization rate (2/3) × 100%) may be performed by repeating an excitation period of 1 ms and a non-excitation period of 500 μs. Such energization can be realized by shortening the update interval of the value of the solenoid-off counter 703. For example, by setting the value update interval of the solenoid-off counter 703d to 500 μs, intermittent energization can be realized by repeating an excitation period of 1 ms and a non-excitation period of 500 μs.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart of normal processing according to the second embodiment. In the normal process of the second embodiment, the main process of the game is executed as in the first embodiment. In the normal processing of the second embodiment, first, the processing of S201 to S204 is executed, and after the processing of S204, the normal symbol A · The decorative design control process is executed (S211). By the normal symbol A / decorative symbol control process, determination of the lottery result of the first lottery, setting of a variation pattern in the normal symbol A display device 901 and the decorative symbol display device 902, and the like are performed.

  After executing the normal symbol A / decorative symbol control process, the normal symbol B control process for controlling the variable display by the normal symbol B display device 925 is executed (S212), and then the control of the variable display by the normal symbol C display device 927 is performed. The normal symbol C control process is performed (S213). The normal symbol B control process determines the lottery result of the second lottery and sets the variation pattern in the normal symbol B display device 925. On the other hand, the normal symbol C control process determines the lottery result of the third lottery. The determination and the setting of the variation pattern in the normal symbol C display device 927 are performed. These normal symbol B control processing and normal symbol C control processing, and the above-described normal symbol A / decoration symbol control processing are all stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area according to the current variation display situation. A change start process is performed according to the existing data, and a confirmation command for confirming the stop symbol is set. In addition, when the number of operation holding balls (N, N ′, N ″) exceeds 0, the number of operation holding balls is decremented by 1 before execution of the fluctuation start process, and the corresponding holding ball storage area (holding) Shift processing for sequentially shifting the data stored in each of the reserved first to fourth areas in the sphere storage area, the second reserved sphere storage area, and the third reserved sphere storage area) to the execution area side is performed.

  After the normal symbol C control process, a tulip opening / closing process for opening or closing the tulips 921a, 922a, 923a corresponding to the lottery results of the first to third lottery is executed (S214). The tulip opening / closing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the tulip opening / closing process, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached by the process of S208. If the execution timing is reached, the process proceeds to S201, and S201 to S204, S211 The process of S214 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S208 that the next normal process execution timing has not yet been reached, the processes of S209 to S210 are performed in the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Execute.

  Next, the tulip opening / closing process (S214) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the tulip opening / closing process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the game by the winning of the first lottery is in progress at that time (S1801). It should be noted that “in the middle of the game by winning the first lottery” includes the beginning of the game by the winning of the first lottery and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the game by the winning.

  As a result of checking in the process of S1801, if the game is in the middle of winning the first lottery (S1801: Yes), the upper tulip release flag 703f is turned on (S1802).

  When the upper tulip release flag 703f is turned on by the processing of S1802, the application (energization) of intermittent excitation current to the upper tulip solenoid 931 is started according to the above-described solenoid control data output processing (S605), and as a result The upper tulip 921a is opened.

  After the process of S1802, it is confirmed whether the maximum opening time (for example, 5.8 seconds) of the upper tulip 921a has elapsed (S1803). In this case, when it is confirmed that the maximum opening time of the upper tulip 921a has elapsed (S1803: Yes), it is determined that the opening of the upper tulip 921a by the winning of the first lottery has ended one round, and the upper tulip opening flag 703f is turned off (S1804).

  Further, as a result of checking in the processing of S1801, if the game by the winning of the first lottery is not in the middle (S1801: No), the processing of S1802 to S1803 is skipped and the upper tulip release flag 703f is turned off (S1804). ).

  When the upper tulip release flag 703f is turned off by the processing of S1804, the energization of the excitation current to the upper tulip solenoid 931 is interrupted according to the solenoid control data output processing (S605) described above, and as a result, the upper tulip 921a is closed. To do.

  After the process of S1804, the process proceeds to S1805. Further, as a result of checking in the process of S1803, even when the maximum open time has not yet elapsed (S1803: No), the process of S1804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the processing of S1805, it is confirmed whether or not the game by the winning of the second lottery is in progress at that time. It should be noted that “in the middle of the game by the winning of the second lottery” includes the time at the start of the game by the winning of the second lottery and during the predetermined time after the game by the winning of the winning.

  As a result of checking in the processing of S1805, if the game is in the middle of winning the second lottery (S1805: Yes), the middle tulip release flag 703g is turned on (S1806).

  When the middle tulip release flag 703g is turned on by the processing of S1806, the application (energization) of intermittent excitation current to the middle tulip solenoid 932 is started according to the solenoid control data output processing (S605) described above, and as a result. The middle tulip 922a opens.

  After the processing of S1806, it is confirmed whether the maximum opening time (for example, 5.8 seconds) of the middle tulip 922a has passed (S1807). In this case, when it is confirmed that the maximum opening time of the middle tulip 922a has passed (S1807: Yes), it is determined that the opening of the middle tulip 922a by the winning of the second lottery has been completed for one round, and the middle tulip opening flag 703g is turned off (S1808).

  Also, as a result of checking in the processing of S1805, when the game by the winning of the second lottery is not in the middle (S1805: No), the processing of S1806 to S1807 is skipped and the middle tulip release flag 703g is turned off (S1808). ).

  When the middle tulip release flag 703g is turned off by the processing of S1808, the energization of the excitation current to the middle tulip solenoid 932 is cut off according to the solenoid control data output processing (S605) described above, and as a result, the middle tulip 922a is closed. To do.

  After the process of S1808, the process proceeds to S1809. Also, as a result of checking in the processing of S1807, even when the maximum open time has not yet elapsed (S1807: No), the processing of S1808 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1809.

  In the processing of S1809, whether or not the game by the winning of the third lottery is in progress is confirmed at that time. It should be noted that “in the middle of the game by the winning of the third lottery” includes the beginning of the game by the winning of the third lottery and the middle of the predetermined time after the game by the winning of the winning.

  As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1809, if the game by winning the third lottery is in progress (S1809: Yes), the lower tulip release flag 703h is turned on (S1810).

  When the lower tulip release flag 703h is turned on by the processing of S1810, intermittent application of energization current (energization) to the lower tulip solenoid 933 is started according to the solenoid control data output processing (S605) described above, and as a result The lower tulip 923a is opened.

  After the process of S1810, it is confirmed whether the maximum opening time (for example, 5.8 seconds) of the lower tulip 923a has elapsed (S1811). In this case, when it is confirmed that the maximum opening time of the lower tulip 923a has passed (S1811: Yes), it is determined that the opening of the lower tulip 923a by the winning of the third lottery has been completed for one round, and the lower tulip opening flag 703h is turned off (S1812), and the tulip opening process is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1809, when the game is not in the middle of winning the third lottery (S1809: No), the processing of S1810 to S1811 is skipped, and the lower tulip release flag 703h is turned off (S1812). ) The tulip opening process is terminated.

  When the lower tulip opening flag 703h is turned off by the processing of S1812, energization of the excitation current to the lower tulip solenoid 933 is cut off according to the solenoid control data output processing (S605) described above, and as a result, the lower tulip 923a is closed. To do.

  On the other hand, if the maximum opening time has not yet elapsed as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1811 (S1811: No), the process of S1812 is skipped and the tulip release process is terminated.

  That is, the above tulip opening / closing process opens the upper tulip 921a, the middle tulip 922a, and the lower tulip 923a for each round when winning in the first to third lotteries, and the maximum opening of each tulip 921a, 922a, 923a. Determine if time has passed. When each tulip 921a, 922a, 923a is opened for the maximum opening time, the tulip 921a, 922a, 923a that satisfies the condition is closed. In the tulip opening / closing process described above, the opening and closing of each tulip 921a, 922a, 923a is made a predetermined number of rounds for each lottery of the first to third lotteries (for example, 1 in the case of the first lottery winner). Round, 4 rounds in case of 2nd and 3rd lottery wins).

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, in the second embodiment described above, the upper tulip solenoid 931 and the middle tulip solenoid 932 generated as a result of the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75) executed by the main controller 561. Next, switching of the lower tulip solenoid 933 between on (excitation) and off (non-excitation) will be described. FIG. 79 is a timing chart of turning on and off various solenoids according to the second embodiment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 79, the middle tulip 922a is always open, that is, the middle tulip opening flag 703g is always on. From the left end of the timing chart shown in FIG. 79 until the time T4 at which control according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is reached, control by the solenoid off counter 703d is unnecessary, so during this period, the solenoid control data By the output process (see FIG. 75), the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c whose first bit is “1” is output at intervals of 2 ms. As a result, during this period, the exciting current is continuously supplied to the middle tulip solenoid 932.

  As will be described in detail later, after T4, the middle tulip solenoid 932 is turned on for 4 ms (energization current energization) and 2 ms off (energization current energization interruption) according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d. Is repeated periodically. While the energization of the continuous or intermittent excitation current shown in this timing chart is performed to the middle stage tulip solenoid 932, the middle stage tulip 922a is kept open, that is, kept open (open state). It is.

  As shown in FIG. 79, when the lower tulip release flag 703h is turned on at the timing T3, as a result of the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75), the solenoid control data memory 703c whose second bit is “1”. The output of the value of is started. Thereby, energization of the excitation current to the lower tulip solenoid 933 is started. Since the control by the solenoid-off counter 703d is unnecessary from T3 to T4, the solenoid control data memory in which the second bit is “1” during this period by the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75). The value of 703c is output at intervals of 2 ms. As a result, the exciting current is continuously supplied to the lower tulip solenoid 933.

  As in the case of the middle tulip solenoid 932 described above, after T4, the lower tulip solenoid 933 is turned on for 4 ms (energization of energizing current) and turned off for 2 ms (excitation) according to the value of the solenoid off counter 703d. Current interruption) is repeated periodically. While the lower tulip solenoid 933 is energized continuously or intermittently as shown in this timing chart, the lower tulip 923a is kept open, that is, kept open (open state). It is. Therefore, during the period from T3 to T4 in the timing chart of FIG. 79, both the middle tulip 922a and the lower tulip 923a are open.

  The lower tulip solenoid 933 is always off until the timing of T3 is reached, because the lower tulip release flag 703h is off during this period. Therefore, in this period, the lower tulip 923a is always closed (closed state).

  When the upper tulip release flag 703f is turned on at the timing of T4, the maximum number of solenoids in which the number of solenoids to which the excitation current is to be applied is equal to or less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612 In this embodiment, since 2) was exceeded, the initial value of the solenoid off counter 703d by the solenoid off counter setting process (see FIG. 76) is set, and the solenoid off counter 703d by the solenoid control data output process (see FIG. 75) is set. The energization control to the solenoids (three tulip solenoids 931 to 933 in this embodiment) corresponding to the value of is started.

  Specifically, when the upper tulip release flag 703 is turned on at timing T4, the initial value of the solenoid off counter 703d is set by the solenoid off counter setting process (see FIG. 76). According to the solenoid-off counter setting process (see FIG. 76), a value that gives a non-excitation period to the middle tulip solenoid 932 that drives the middle tulip 922a that has been opened earlier, that is, “1” is set. The

  Therefore, at the timing of T4 when the upper tulip release flag 703 is turned on, output of the value of the solenoid control data memory 703c whose 0th bit is “1” is started. Thereby, opening of the upper tulip 921a is started.

  After T4, the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, according to the value (“0” to “2”) of the solenoid off counter 703d updated at each execution of the solenoid control data output processing activated at intervals of 2 ms, Periodic energization of the excitation current to the lower tulip solenoid 933 (ON) and energization interruption (OFF) are started. That is, according to the value of the solenoid-off counter 703d updated every 2 ms, the upper tulip solenoid 931 is turned off during the 2 ms period when the value is “0”, while the middle tulip solenoid 932 and the lower tulip solenoid 932 933 is turned on.

  Further, during a period of 2 ms in which the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is “1”, the middle tulip solenoid 932 is turned off, while the upper tulip solenoid 931 and the lower tulip solenoid 933 are turned on. Further, during the 2 ms period when the value of the solenoid off counter 703d is “2”, the lower tulip solenoid 933 is turned off, while the upper tulip solenoid 931 and the middle tulip solenoid 932 are turned on. As a result, an intermittent excitation current is passed through each of the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933 with one cycle of the excitation period of 4 ms and the non-excitation period of 2 ms. While the intermittent excitation current is applied to the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933, the upper tulip 921a and the middle tulip 922a corresponding to the solenoids 931 to 933 are provided. The lower tulip 923a is kept open, that is, kept open (open state).

  The upper tulip solenoid 931 is always off until the timing of T4 is reached, because the upper tulip release flag 703f is off during this period. Therefore, during this period, the upper tulip 921a is always closed (closed state).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the main controller 561, the solenoid off counter 703d is updated every 2 ms, and the energization rate is (2/3) × 100%. 3 solenoids (upper tulip solenoid 931, middle tulip solenoid 932, lower tulip solenoid 933) are controlled so that the number of solenoids energized simultaneously is two at the maximum. However, the number of solenoids controlled by the solenoid off counter 703d is not limited to three, and the number of solenoids that can be controlled by increasing the number counted by the solenoid off counter 703d and changing the energization rate. It is possible to increase or decrease the number of.

For example, let S be the number of solenoids whose total current consumption is to be controlled, and the maximum number of solenoids that can be driven by the control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply device 612, that is, the total current consumption due to driving depends on the power supply capacity. the maximum number of current consumption below the (less than or) a solenoid acceptable when the S ₁ is solenoid oFF counter 703d, the value counted by 723d from "0", "n (S-1)" (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the current consumption rate of each solenoid is (S ₁ / S) × 100%, thereby controlling the total current consumption of various numbers of solenoids. Is possible.

In this case, for each value indicated by the solenoid off counter 703d, the output off data 702a1 is configured so that the energization of the excitation current is cut off to (S−S ₁ ) solenoids (that is, in the corresponding bits). By storing “0”, the number of solenoids energized with the excitation current corresponds to each value so that it is less than (or less than) the current consumption allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612. It is possible to control energization (ON) and energization interruption (OFF) of the excitation current to the attached solenoid. Further, in the output off data 702a1, for one solenoid, S ₁ consecutive values among the values indicated by the solenoid off counter 703d (however, the maximum value in the solenoid off counter 723d → the minimum value (in this embodiment) (“0”) is also continuous), an excitation current is applied to the solenoid (ie, “1” is stored in the corresponding bit), while continuous ( For S−S ₁ ) values (however, the maximum value in the solenoid-off counter 723d → the minimum value (“0” in this embodiment) is also continuous)) is deenergized excitation current (i.e., the corresponding storing "0" in bits) by configuring the data so, for each solenoid, (S ₁ / It can be energized intermittent excitation current in) × 100% duty factor. Therefore, the output off data 702a (or the output off table 702a) is configured as described above, and driven by the solenoid by energizing the intermittent excitation current at the energization rate of (S ₁ / S) × 100%. (In this embodiment, for example, the upper tulip 921a driven by the upper tulip solenoid 931) is kept open, and the total current consumption is less than or equal to the amount allowed by the power capacity of the power supply device 612 (or Less than).

  Since each solenoid output off table 702a is 1 byte of data, each value of the solenoid off counter 703d can only manage data for 8 solenoids. The number of solenoids that can be managed can be increased.

  In the second embodiment, the number of open flags that are turned on is permitted for the main control device 561 according to the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612 by the solenoid control data output processing (see FIG. 75). When it is confirmed that the number of solenoids that are equal to or less than (or less than) the current consumption is exceeded, the on / off counters 703i, 703j, and 703k are compared to determine the solenoid corresponding to the on / off counter having the largest value (upper tulip). For the solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, or the lower tulip solenoid 933), the value of the solenoid-off counter 723d that sets the energization cut-off period first is set. That is, an energization cut-off period is provided for a solenoid that has been energized earlier. Therefore, the total amount of current consumed by the solenoids provided in the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933) is allowed by the power supply capacity of the power supply board 612. Even if it exceeds (or exceeds) the maximum current consumption, the maximum current consumption allowed according to the power supply capacity while starting energization to the solenoid that should be energized anew The following (or less) can be controlled. Accordingly, the time lag between the timing at which the driving of the movable member (upper tulip 921a, middle tulip 922a, lower tulip 923a) is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  Therefore, as described above, by controlling the total current consumption amount energized to the solenoid, the power supply device 612 can be diverted without having to make a design change, and the power supply device 12 is provided on the inner frame 13. If so, the inner frame 13 can be used. In addition, it is possible to attach different types (models) of game boards 16 without unnecessarily increasing the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612.

  Further, as described above, even when the excitation current is periodically turned on and off in order to control the total current consumption for the three solenoids 931, 932, 933, each solenoid 931, Each tulip 921a, 922a, and 923a corresponding to 932 and 933 is held open. Therefore, as described above, by controlling the total current consumption using the solenoid-off counter 703d, it is possible to simultaneously drive the members by the solenoid and control the total current consumption by the solenoid.

  In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, since the three solenoids 931 to 933 are controlled only by the solenoid-off counter 703d, the display control device 505 in the first embodiment has a main configuration. The processing of S1503 or S1504 of the processing (see FIG. 67) is unnecessary. Therefore, in the main process executed by the display control device 505 of the second embodiment, the process of S1505 is executed after the execution of the variable display process (S1502). If it is confirmed by the process of S1505 that the execution timing of the next process of S1502 has been reached (S1505: Yes), the process of S1501 is executed again, but if not (S1505) : No), it returns to the processing of S1505, and waits until the execution timing of the next processing of S1505 is reached.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the door solenoid control data output process (S1504) is configured to be executed in the main process executed in the 2ms cycle executed by the MPU 721 of the display control device 505. It may be configured to be executed as a timer interrupt process to be started.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although the normal area | region and the specific area are divided and provided in the inside of the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a, it is good also considering this as only a specific area. In this case, the right to continue when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of game balls pass through the specific area within a predetermined time) while the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the big hit state is opened is satisfied. And after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be opened again. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) with the occurrence of a jackpot state without providing such conditions.

In the second embodiment, there are three solenoids for controlling the total current consumption, that is, the large opening solenoid 581, the right door solenoid 177, and the left door solenoid 184 in the first embodiment. In the embodiment, the upper tulip solenoid 931, the middle tulip solenoid 932, and the lower tulip solenoid 933 are three. However, the number of solenoids to be controlled is not limited to the number shown in the above embodiment. The number of solenoids to be controlled is configured so that the number counted by the solenoid off counter 703d or the solenoid off counter 723d can be counted by the number of solenoids to be controlled (or an integer multiple of the number of solenoids to be controlled). The energization rate to each solenoid may be changed. Note that the number of solenoids whose total current consumption is to be controlled is S, and the maximum number of solenoids that can be driven by a control board (power supply board) constituting the power supply device 612, that is, the total current consumption due to driving depends on the power supply capacity. the solenoids to be below the maximum current consumption amount allowed (less than or) when the S ₁ may be a duty ratio _{(S 1 / S) × 100} % and.

  In the above-described embodiment, the solenoid-off counters 703d and 723d are configured to be updated at a timing of every 2 ms. However, this update timing may be set to other values (for example, 1 ms or 500 μs). That is, in the first embodiment, intermittent energization with an energization rate of 50% is performed by repeating a 2 ms energization period (excitation period) and a 2 ms energization cut-off period (non-excitation period). By setting the update timing of the solenoid-off counter 723d to 500 μs, intermittent energization is performed by repeating a 500 μs energization period (excitation period) and a 500 μs energization cut-off period (non-excitation period), or the above In the second embodiment, the intermittent energization of the energization rate (2/3) × 100% is made by repeating the energization period (excitation period) of 4 ms and the energization cut-off period (non-excitation period) of 2 ms. For example, by setting the update timing of the solenoid-off counter 703d to 500 μs, the energization period (excitation period) of 500 μs and the energization cut-off of 500 μs During it may be configured to perform a repetitive intermittent energization by the (non-energized period).

  In the above embodiment, the number of open flags that are turned on is equal to or less than (or less than) the amount of current consumption allowed for the main control device 561 or the display control device 505 according to the power supply capacity of the power supply device 612. When it is confirmed that the number of solenoids to be exceeded is confirmed, the energization cut-off period is preferentially provided to the solenoid that has been energized earlier (earliest) before the confirmation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the solenoid has been energized before the confirmation, the energization cut-off period is appropriately provided regardless of the timing of the start of energization. Also good. As described above, the time lag between the timing at which the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 to 0 by providing an energization cutoff period for the solenoid that has been energized before the confirmation. Can be small.

  In the second embodiment, when the backup data is stored in the backup area 703a in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the main controller 561, the solenoid-off counter remaining in the backup data. Although the value of 703d is set as the initial value, even when the backup data is stored in the backup area 703a when the power is turned on, the value of the solenoid-off counter 703d is set to a predetermined value such as “0”. You may comprise so that it may set to.

  In the solenoid off counter setting process (see FIG. 69) of the first embodiment and the solenoid off counter setting process (see FIG. 76) of the second embodiment, an on / off counter (right door on / off counter 723f, left door on / off counter 723g, Using the upper tulip on / off counter 703i, middle tulip on / off counter 703j, lower tulip on / off counter 703k), the corresponding movable members (right door 171, left door 172, upper tulip 921a, middle tulip 922a, lower tulip 923a) are opened. The length of time that was taken was taken as the knowledge of the opening order of each movable member. Instead of the on / off counter as described above, the timing at which each movable member is released (or the timing at which energization of the excitation current to the corresponding solenoid is started) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 703, and the timing at which the movable member is released is determined. The initial value of the solenoid off counter may be set with priority given to the earlier one.

  Alternatively, the timing at which each movable member is released (or the timing at which energization of energizing current is started to the corresponding solenoid or the timing at which the energizing current is instructed to the corresponding solenoid) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 703. You may comprise so that it may memorize | store and the energization of the exciting current may be started with the energization rate according to the number of solenoids to be controlled in order from the earliest timing.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the first symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as identification information together with the symbols or separately from the symbols.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Below, the game machine and modification of this invention are shown. In the following, for easy understanding, each constituent element is not limited to the constituent elements of the gaming machine of the present invention and the specific structure shown in parentheses. A plurality of movable members that can move between the first position and the second position, and the position of each of the movable members is either the first position or the second position, depending on the gaming state or the production state. A position designating unit for designating the position of the movable member, and when the position of the movable member is designated as the first position by the position designating unit, the movable member is positioned at the first position by applying current. Thus, when the position of the movable member is designated as the second position by the position designation means, it is provided for each movable member that positions the movable member at the second position by turning off the current. In a gaming machine comprising a plurality of drive means, a designated position confirmation means for confirming the position of the movable member designated by the position designation means, and a total consumption current amount energized to the drive means Supply A detecting means for detecting whether the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, and the position designation means designates the first position. The total current consumption due to energization of the drive means that should control the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member confirmed by the designated position confirmation means is detected by the detection means. When the amount of power consumption is detected to exceed or exceed the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from the state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply, the total current consumption is allowed by the capacity of the power supply. Drive to the drive means that has been designated as the first position by the position designation means from before the detection by the detection means so that the amount is less than or less than As the initial value of the information, the drive information initial value setting means for setting energization cutoff instruction information for instructing not to energize the current, and the initial value of the drive information by the drive information initial value setting means, The energization of the drive means to control the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member confirmed by the designated position confirmation means to have been designated as the first position by the position designation means. Instructing each of the drive means that should control the total current consumption to energize the current so that the total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current. Drive information setting means for setting the energization instruction information to be performed or the energization cutoff instruction information as drive information every predetermined time, and the drive information setting means or the drive information initial stage When drive information is set for each of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled by the value setting means, output means for outputting the drive information to the drive means is provided. A gaming machine 1.

  In the gaming machine 1, each of the drive information setting means that is performed at predetermined time intervals is a drive means that should control the total current consumption amount in which the position of the movable member is designated as the first position by the position designation means. On the other hand, an intermittent current in which an energization period for energizing current and an energization interruption period for interrupting current energization are periodically repeated is expressed as [(the amount of total current consumption is allowed by the capacity of the power source. The drive information is assigned so as to be energized at an energization rate of 100% or less, or the total number of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled. A gaming machine 2 characterized by this. Even if it is necessary to energize the drive means to position the movable member in the first position (maintain it in the first position), the energization rate is [(total current consumption is allowed by the capacity of the power source. The number of drive means that are less than or less than the amount) / (total number of drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled)] × 100% by performing intermittent energization to drive the movable member and the total current consumption Can be realized simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the game machine 1 or 2 includes an energization start timing storage unit that stores an energization start timing for the drive unit corresponding to the movable member whose position is specified by the position specifying unit. The drive information initial value setting means includes the drive information corresponding to the movable member whose position designated by the position designation means is confirmed to be the first position by the detection position confirmation means. The total current consumption amount due to energization of the driving means whose total current consumption amount is to be controlled is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source and exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. Before the timing before detection by the detection means is stored by the energization start timing storage means. Game machine 3, wherein the drive means, the to be used to set the current blocking instruction information as the driving information.

  The total amount of current consumed by energizing the corresponding driving means to position the movable member in the first position (maintain it in the first position) is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. The drive corresponding to the movable member designated as the first position, which is stored by the energization start timing storage means when it is detected from the state that the amount exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source The energization is interrupted for the drive means that has started energization at the timing when the energization is started before the detection. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  Note that the “timing at which energization is started to the drive unit” stored in the energization start timing storage unit is designated from the second position to the first position by designating the first position by the position designating unit. Only the timing at which energization of the drive means is started for the movement, or the designation of the first position by the position designation means is continuing, and the energization period and the energization cut-off period for maintaining the movable member at the first position. When intermittent energization is repeated, the start timing may be updated each time the energization period is started.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, an energization start timing storage unit that stores a timing at which energization of the drive unit corresponding to the movable member whose position is specified by the position specifying unit is the first position; Energization time storage means for storing a time length from the timing stored in the energization start timing storage means, and the drive information initial value setting means is specified by the detection means by the specified position confirmation means. The total consumption current amount due to energization to the drive means that should control the total consumption current amount in the drive means corresponding to the movable member that is confirmed that the designated position by the means is the first position is the power supply When it is detected that it exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from the state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of The energization interruption instruction information is set as the drive information for the drive means that is stored by the energization time storage means as being energized before detection by the detection means. A gaming machine 4 characterized by the above.

  The total amount of current consumed by energizing the corresponding driving means to position the movable member in the first position (maintain it in the first position) is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. From the state of the above, when it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, the energization time storage unit stores the energization from before the detection. Power is cut off. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  Note that the “time length from the timing stored in the energization start storage unit” stored in the energization time storage unit is designated by the position designation unit as the first position, so that the movable member is moved from the second position. Only the length from the timing at which energization of the drive means is started in order to move the drive means to the first position, or the designation of the first position by the position designation means is continuing, and the movable member is maintained at the first position. Therefore, in the case where intermittent energization that repeats the energization period and the energization cut-off period is performed, the timing from the timing when the energization period is started and closest to the detection timing before the detection is long. It may be good.

  Further, the “timing at which energization of the drive unit is started” stored in the energization start timing storage unit is designated by the position designating unit to move the movable member from the second position to the first position. Only the timing at which energization of the drive means is started for the movement, or the designation of the first position by the position designation means is continuing, and the energization period and the energization cut-off period for maintaining the movable member at the first position. When intermittent energization is repeated, the start timing may be updated each time the energization period is started.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4 includes main control means for performing main control relating to the game, and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to the game based on an instruction output from the main control means by one-way communication. The main control means includes drive status information transmitting means for transmitting information related to the drive status of the drive means controlled by the main control means to the peripheral control means, and the drive information initial value setting means is the detection By the means, to the drive means for controlling the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member that is confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position. From the state in which the total current consumption due to energization is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source by the detection means, the capacity of the power source The timing before detection by the detection means is stored in the energization start timing storage means among the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means when it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the amount to be accommodated. The drive means controlled by the peripheral control means, or the drive means stored by the energization time storage means that the energization is performed before the detection by the detection means, as the drive information A gaming machine 5 characterized by setting energization cutoff instruction information.

  Generally, a gaming machine includes main control means for performing main control relating to a game and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to a game based on an instruction output from the main control means. Thus, the entire gaming machine is controlled. In this case, the main control means performs one-way communication with the peripheral control means. That is, the main control means cannot receive instructions from the peripheral control means. Therefore, the main control means cannot know the information of the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means. For this reason, since the number of drive units that require energization increases due to the designation of the first position, the total current consumption amount of the current that is energized to the drive unit that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even when it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the allowable amount depending on the capacity of the power supply from the state below or below the allowable amount, the main control is performed based on the instruction input from the main control means. By controlling the energization or interruption of current to the drive means for the peripheral control means that can know the status of the means, the total amount of current consumed by energizing the drive means in the entire gaming machine can be It is possible to control the amount allowed by the capacity, that is, less than (or less than) the maximum current consumption allowed for the entire gaming machine.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4 includes main control means for performing main control relating to the game, and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to the game based on an instruction output from the main control means by one-way communication. The detecting means is (1) the total amount of current consumption energized by the plurality of driving means controlled by the main control means is allowed by the capacity of the power source defined in advance for the main control means. Detecting whether the amount exceeds or exceeds the first predetermined amount from the state less than or less than the first predetermined amount, which is an amount within the range of the amount to be performed, and (2) the peripheral control means The total amount of current consumption energized by the plurality of drive means controlled by the above-mentioned peripheral control means is defined in advance as [(amount allowed by the capacity of the power source) − (the first predetermined amount )] In the range Whether or not the second predetermined amount is exceeded or exceeded is detected from a state below or below the second predetermined amount, and the drive information initial value setting means is: (1) the specified position by the detection means; Driving means for controlling the total current consumption in the driving means corresponding to the movable member controlled by the main control means confirmed by the confirmation means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position. The drive controlled by the main control means when it is detected that the total current consumption amount due to energization to exceeds or exceeds the first predetermined amount from a state of less than or less than the first predetermined amount Among the means, the timing before the detection by the detection means is the drive means stored by the energization start timing storage means or the detection by the detection means. The energization cutoff instruction information is set as the drive information for the drive means that is energized and stored in the energization time storage means. On the other hand, (2) the detection means The total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member controlled by the peripheral control means, which is confirmed by the designated position confirmation means as the first position by the position designation means, should be controlled. When it is detected that the total current consumption amount due to energization to the drive means exceeds or exceeds the second predetermined amount from a state of less than or less than the second predetermined amount, it is controlled by the peripheral control means. Among the drive means, the drive means in which the timing before detection by the detection means is stored by the energization start timing storage means, or A game characterized in that the energization cutoff instruction information is set as the drive information for the drive means stored in the energization time storage means that the energization has occurred before detection by the detection means. Machine 6.

  Generally, a gaming machine includes main control means for performing main control relating to a game and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to a game based on an instruction output from the main control means. Thus, the entire gaming machine is controlled. In this case, the main control means performs one-way communication with the peripheral control means. That is, the main control means cannot receive instructions from the peripheral control means. Therefore, the main control means cannot know the information of the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means. Therefore, by defining the allowable current consumption amount according to the capacity of the power supply that supplies current to the main control means and the peripheral control means, respectively, the total consumption by the energized driving means in each control means. When it is detected that the current exceeds (or has exceeded) each of the allowable current consumption amounts, the current supply to the drive means controlled by each control means is turned on or off independently. Controlled. Here, the total amount of current consumed by energizing the drive means is controlled for each control means. In this case, the total allowable current consumption defined for each control means is the maximum allowable current consumption (or less or less) depending on the power supply capacity of the power supply board of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to control the total consumption current amount by energizing the driving means in the entire gaming machine to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current amount allowed for the entire gaming machine.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 6, a counter that counts a number equal to n times (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) the total number of the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled, and a value of the counter , Counter updating means for updating every time corresponding to the time interval at which output by the output means is performed, and for each value of the counter [(total number of driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled) − Allocation information in which the energization cutoff instruction information is allocated to a number of the driving means corresponding to (the total number of the driving means in which the total current consumption amount is equal to or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source) Allocation information storage means for storing the drive information, the drive information initial value setting means for the movable member that has been confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position. The total consumption current amount due to energization to the drive means that should control the total consumption current amount in the corresponding drive means is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source by the detection means, The timing before the detection by the detection means in the driving means controlled by the peripheral control means when the detected amount exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply is the energization start timing. The allocation information storage means stores the drive means stored by the storage means or the drive means stored by the energization time storage means that the power is supplied before detection by the detection means. In the assigned information, a counter that sets the assigned value of the energization cutoff instruction information to the initial value of the counter Gaming machine 7, characterized in that it comprises a period value setting means.

  Depending on the value of the counter, [(total number of drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled) − (number of drive means whose total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source)] Current supply to the corresponding number of driving means is interrupted. In other words, current can be supplied to only a number of drive means that always has a maximum amount of current consumed by energizing the drive means that is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply. In such control of the total current consumption, the initial value of the counter is determined by the driving means in which a current energization instruction is started before the detection, or the drive that is continuously energized before the detection. The value is set on the basis of the allocation information storage means so that the power cut-off instruction information is assigned to the means. As a result, the current that has been supplied to the drive means that has been instructed to energize the current before the detection, or the drive means that has continued to be supplied before the detection is always cut off first. Become. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  The gaming machine 7 includes main control means for performing main control related to games, and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control related to games based on instructions output from the main control means by one-way communication. A first counter that counts n times (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) the number of drive means that should control the total current consumption in the main control means; and the total current consumption in the peripheral control means. A second counter that counts m times the number of the drive means to be controlled (m is an integer of 1 or more), and the allocation information storage means is (1) for each value of the first counter, [(Total number of driving means to control the total consumption current amount in the main control means) − (The total consumption current amount by energizing the driving means controlled by the main control means is the main control means Against The number of the drive means corresponding to the number of the drive means that is equal to or less than a first predetermined amount that is within the range of the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source defined for (2) For each value of the second counter, ((total number of the driving means for controlling the total current consumption in the peripheral control means) -(The amount of current consumption by energization of the driving means controlled by the peripheral control means is an amount within a range of the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, which is defined in advance for the peripheral control means; The number of the drive means that is equal to or less than the second predetermined amount is less than or equal to the number of the drive means, and stores the allocation information in which the energization cutoff instruction information is assigned, and the counter initial value Setting means (1) A total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member controlled by the main control means, which is confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position. The total consumption current amount due to energization of the drive means whose amount is to be controlled is an amount within the range of the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, which is defined in advance for the main control means by the detection means. From the detection by the detection means in the drive means controlled by the main control means when it is detected that it exceeds or exceeds the first predetermined quantity from a state below or below a certain first predetermined quantity The energization time recording indicates that the previous timing is energized from before the detection by the drive means or the detection means stored in the energization start timing storage means. A value assigned to the energization cutoff instruction information in the assignment information stored by the assignment information storage means is set as an initial value of the first counter for the drive means stored by the storage means. On the other hand, (2) the drive means corresponding to the movable member controlled by the peripheral control means, which is confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position. The total current consumption due to the energization of the drive means to control the total current consumption is defined in advance by the detection means for the peripheral control means [(allowed by the capacity of the power source. (Amount))-(the first predetermined amount)] is detected when exceeding or exceeding the second predetermined amount from a state below or below the second predetermined amount. In addition, among the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means, the timing before the detection by the detection means is stored in the energization start timing storage means, or the detection by the detection means The value assigned to the energization cutoff instruction information in the allocation information stored by the allocation information storage means for the drive means that has been energized from before is stored by the energization time storage means, A gaming machine 8 which is set to an initial value of the second counter.

  Generally, a gaming machine includes main control means for performing main control relating to a game and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to a game based on an instruction output from the main control means. Thus, the entire gaming machine is controlled. In this case, the main control means performs one-way communication with the peripheral control means. That is, the main control means does not receive an instruction from the peripheral control means. Therefore, the main control means cannot know the information of the drive means controlled by the control means. According to the gaming machine 8, by defining an allowable current consumption amount for each of the main control means and the peripheral control means, the total current consumption by the energized driving means is allowed in each control means. A counter provided in each control means for energizing or interrupting current to the drive means controlled by each control means when it is detected that the current consumption exceeds (or has exceeded) (First counter, second counter, etc.) are controlled independently. Therefore, the total allowable current consumption defined for each control means is the maximum current consumption allowed (or less or less) depending on the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) of the gaming machine. By doing so, it is possible to control to less than (or less than) the maximum current consumption allowed for the entire gaming machine.

  In such control of the total current consumption, the initial values of the counters (the first counter and the second counter) are the drive means for which the current energization instruction is started before the detection, or the detection The value is set such that the power cut-off instruction information is assigned to the drive means that has been energized from before. As a result, the current that has been supplied to the drive means that has been instructed to energize the current before the detection, or the drive means that has continued to be supplied before the detection is always cut off first. Become. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  In addition, the 1st counter provided in a main control means may be one, or plural. Also, the peripheral control means may be provided with one or more second counters. Here, when there are a plurality of counters (first counter and second counter) provided in the main control means or the peripheral control means, these counters are assumed to be synchronized with each other.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 6, a counter that counts a number equal to n times (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) the total number of the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled, and a value of the counter , Counter updating means for updating every time corresponding to the time interval at which output by the output means is performed, and for each value of the counter [(total number of driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled) − The energization cutoff instruction information is assigned to the number of driving means corresponding to (the total current consumption amount is equal to or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source). An allocation information storage unit that stores allocation information to which the energization instruction information is assigned to a drive unit to which the energization cutoff instruction information is not allocated among the drive units that should control the total current consumption amount; If the position designated by the position designation means is the first position, the energization instruction information is designated by the position designation means on the other hand for each of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled. If the position is the second position, a first drive information setting means for setting the energization cutoff instruction information as first drive information is provided, and the drive information initial value setting means is configured to designate the position by the designated position confirmation means. The total consumption current amount due to energization to the drive means that should control the total consumption current amount in the drive means corresponding to the movable member that is confirmed that the designated position by the means is the first position is the detection. If the means detects that the power supply capacity exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the power supply capacity from a state less than or less than the quantity allowed by the power supply capacity, Among the means, the drive means in which the timing before the detection by the detection means is stored in the energization start timing storage means, or that the energization time is stored that is energized before the detection by the detection means Counter initial value setting for setting the assigned value of the energization cutoff instruction information in the assignment information stored by the assignment information storage means to the initial value of the counter for the drive means stored by the means And the energization instruction information or the energization cutoff instruction information as allocation information stored in the allocation information storage unit in accordance with the initial value of the counter set by the counter initial value setting unit, and the first drive Second drive information setting means for setting drive information based on the first drive information set by the information setting means. A gaming machine 9 that is characterized by

  First drive information corresponding to the position of the movable member specified by the position specifying means is first set by the first drive information setting means. On the other hand, in the allocation information storage means, for each value of the counter, [(total number of driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled) − (total current consumption is less than or equal to the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply or Energization cutoff instruction information is assigned to the number of drive means corresponding to the number of drive means that is less than the number of drive means], and among the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled, Allocation information to which energization instruction information is allocated is stored for the drive means that are not present. Then, the drive information initial value setting means refers to the value of the counter, and in the assignment information storage means, the drive information (energization instruction information or energization cutoff) assigned to each drive means with respect to the counter value. Based on the instruction information) and the first drive information set by the first drive information setting means, drive information for each of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled is set. That is, according to the first drive information corresponding to the position specifying means for specifying the position of the movable member, even if the drive means is to be energized according to the energization instruction information, depending on the value of the counter, Current supply is cut off. Therefore, by referring to the value of the counter, the total current consumption amount due to the energization of the drive means can be easily reduced to (or less than) the maximum current consumption amount allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) Can be controlled.

  Note that “based on the first drive information set by the first drive information setting means and the energization instruction information or the energization cut-off instruction information as the allocation information stored in the allocation information storage means” means allocation information storage The energization instruction information or the energization cutoff instruction information as allocation information corresponding to the value of the counter stored by the means and the first drive information setting means are set according to the position of the movable member specified by the position specifying means. Further, it is possible to exemplify taking a logical product with the energization instruction information or the energization cutoff instruction information as the first drive information. Specifically, when the allocation information is energization cutoff instruction information, the logic of the allocation information and the first drive information is the same regardless of whether the first drive information is energization instruction information or energization cutoff instruction information. As a result of taking the product, the drive information is set to the energization cutoff instruction information. If the allocation information is energization instruction information, if the first drive information is energization instruction information, the drive information is set in the energization instruction information as a result of taking a logical product. On the other hand, even if the allocation information is energization instruction information, if the first drive information is energization interruption instruction information, the drive information is set as the energization interruption instruction information as a result of taking a logical product. Accordingly, with respect to the driving means corresponding to one movable member, the energization instruction information is designated as the first driving information by the designation of the first position by the position designation means, while being stored in the allocation information storage means. If the allocation information according to the value indicated by the counter is the energization cutoff instruction information, the energization cutoff instruction information is set as drive information by taking the logical product of the first drive information and the allocation information in this case.

  In such control of the total current consumption, the initial value of the counter is determined by the driving means in which a current energization instruction is started before the detection, or the drive that is continuously energized before the detection. The value is set such that the power cut-off instruction information is assigned to the means. As a result, the current that has been supplied to the drive means that has been instructed to energize the current before the detection, or the drive means that has continued to be supplied before the detection is always cut off first. Become. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  The gaming machine 9 includes main control means for performing main control relating to a game, and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to a game based on an instruction output from the main control means by one-way communication, A first counter that counts n times (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) the number of drive means that should control the total current consumption in the main control means; and the total current consumption in the peripheral control means. A second counter that counts m times the number of the drive means to be controlled (m is an integer of 1 or more), and the allocation information storage means is (1) for each value of the first counter, [(Total number of driving means to control the total consumption current amount in the main control means) − (The total consumption current amount by energizing the driving means controlled by the main control means is the main control means Against The number of the drive means corresponding to the number of the drive means that is equal to or less than a first predetermined amount that is within the range of the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source defined for On the other hand, among the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled by the main control means, the energization instruction information is assigned to the driving means to which no energization interruption instruction information is assigned. (2) For each value of the second counter, [(total number of the driving means for controlling the total current consumption amount in the peripheral control means) − (the peripheral control) The total amount of current consumed by energization of the driving means controlled by the means is an amount within a range of an amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, which is defined in advance for the peripheral control means. More than quantitative Or the number of drive means corresponding to the number of drive means)] is assigned to the number of drive means corresponding to the number of drive means, while the peripheral control means is configured to control the total current consumption amount of the drive means. Among them, for the drive means not assigned with the energization cutoff instruction information, the assignment information assigned with the energization instruction information is stored, and the counter initial value setting means includes (1) the designated position confirmation means. The position designated by the position designation means is confirmed to be the first position by energizing the drive means to control the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member controlled by the main control means. The total consumption current amount is an amount within the range of the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source, which is defined in advance for the main control unit by the detection unit. When it is detected from the state below or below the first predetermined amount that the first predetermined amount is exceeded or exceeded, the drive means controlled by the main control means before detection by the detection means The driving means in which the timing is stored by the energization start timing storage means, or the drive means in which the energization time storage means stores that energization is performed before detection by the detection means, In the allocation information stored by the allocation information storage means, the value assigned to the energization cutoff instruction information is set to the initial value of the first counter, while (2) the specified position confirmation Corresponding to the movable member controlled by the peripheral control means confirmed by the means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position The total consumption current amount by energizing the drive means to control the total consumption current amount in the drive means is defined in advance for the peripheral control means by the detection means [(by the capacity of the power source When it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the second predetermined amount from the state below or below the second predetermined amount, which is an amount within the range of “allowable amount) − (the first predetermined amount)”, Among the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means, the drive means in which the timing before detection by the detection means is stored in the energization start timing storage means, or energization from before the detection by the detection means In response to the driving means stored in the energization time storage means, the energization cutoff finger in the allocation information stored in the allocation information storage means The value to which the information is assigned is set to the initial value of the second counter, and the second drive information setting means is (1) the first counter of the first counter set by the counter initial value setting means. The energization instruction information or the energization cut-off instruction information as allocation information stored in the allocation information storage unit according to an initial value, and the drive unit controlled by the main control unit by the first drive information setting unit The drive information is set based on the first drive information set in the above, or (2) the allocation information storage means according to the initial value of the second counter set by the counter initial value setting means And the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means by the first drive information setting means The gaming machine 10 is characterized in that driving information is set based on the first driving information set in the above.

  Generally, a gaming machine includes main control means for performing main control relating to a game and peripheral control means for performing peripheral control relating to a game based on an instruction output from the main control means. Thus, the entire gaming machine is controlled. In this case, the main control means performs one-way communication with the peripheral control means. That is, the main control means does not receive an instruction from the peripheral control means. Therefore, the main control means cannot know the information of the drive means controlled by the control means. According to the gaming machine 10, by defining an allowable current consumption amount for each of the main control means and the peripheral control means, the total current consumed by the energized driving means is allowed for each control means. A counter provided in each control means for energizing or interrupting current to the drive means controlled by each control means when it is detected that the current consumption exceeds (or has exceeded) (First counter, second counter, etc.) are controlled independently. Therefore, the total allowable current consumption defined for each control means is the maximum current consumption allowed (or less or less) depending on the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) of the gaming machine. By doing so, it is possible to control to less than (or less than) the maximum current consumption allowed for the entire gaming machine.

  In such control of the total current consumption, the initial values of the counters (the first counter and the second counter) are the drive means for which the current energization instruction is started before the detection, or the detection The value is set such that the power cut-off instruction information is assigned to the drive means that has been energized from before. As a result, the current that has been supplied to the drive means that has been instructed to energize the current before the detection, or the drive means that has continued to be supplied before the detection is always cut off first. Become. Therefore, by setting the period during which the energization is interrupted as a period during which the movable member can be maintained at the first position, the movable member is maintained at the first position during the energization interruption period. Therefore, since the number of driving means that need to be energized increases because the first position is designated, the total current consumption amount of the current that is supplied to the driving means that drives the movable member depends on the capacity of the power source. Even if it is detected from the state below or below the permissible amount that it exceeds or exceeds the permissible amount depending on the capacity of the power supply, energization is started to the drive means that should be energized anew. However, the total consumption current amount can be controlled to be equal to or less than (or less than) the maximum consumption current allowed according to the power supply capacity of the power supply (power supply board) that supplies current to the driving means. Therefore, the time lag between the timing when the driving of the movable member is instructed and the actual driving timing can be reduced to 0 or smaller.

  In addition, the 1st counter provided in a main control means may be one, or plural. Also, the peripheral control means may be provided with one or more second counters. Here, when there are a plurality of counters (first counter and second counter) provided in the main control means or the peripheral control means, these counters are assumed to be synchronized with each other.

  The gaming machine 11 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an operating port), the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  The gaming machine 13 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame and a lower plate unit were opened. It is a front view of a game board. (A) is the perspective view of an outer frame, (b) is the perspective view which expanded and showed the metal fitting periphery of the outer frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame and a lower pan set were removed. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a center frame. It is a partial exploded perspective view of a center frame. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front base frame. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rear base frame. (A) is a front view of a variable display unit, (b) is a rear view of a variable display unit. (A)-(c) is the elements on larger scale of the stage member which respectively show the rolling aspect of a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the drive mechanism of a door body. (A)-(d) is a figure explaining the operating state of a door body, respectively. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a perspective view of a ball launch unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball launch unit. It is a perspective view of the ball launch unit in a state where the opening and closing member is opened. It is a perspective view of the ball launch unit showing the internal configuration of the ball feed mechanism. (A) is a rear view of a front frame, (b) is sectional drawing in the RR line of Fig.11 (a). It is the figure which looked at the exit part of the upper plate which sends out a game ball to a ball | bowl launch unit, and showed it in cross section. It is a front view of a glass unit. It is sectional drawing in the Sa-Sa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing in the Sb-Sb line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing in the Sc-Sc line | wire of FIG. It is the elements on larger scale of the glass unit seen from the arrow V direction of FIG. It is a front view of a lower plate unit. It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the control board unit and back pack unit of a pachinko machine back. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled | attached the game board to the inner frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the inner frame from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a perspective view of a support metal fitting. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 1st control board unit. It is a perspective view of a 1st control board unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st control board unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 1st control board unit from the back. It is a front view of a 2nd control board unit. It is a perspective view of a 2nd control board unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd control board unit. It is a rear view of the back pack unit seen from the back of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back pack unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a tank rail. It is a front view of a locking unit. It is a front perspective view of a locking unit. It is a back perspective view of a locking unit. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data memorize | stored in the solenoid control data memory stored in RAM of a main controller for every bit. (A) is a figure which shows the door solenoid output off table stored in the program ROM of a display control apparatus, (b) is the data memorize | stored in the solenoid control data memory stored in the work RAM of a display control apparatus It is a figure which shows the structure of for every bit. It is the figure which showed the 1st design individually. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of various counters. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the normal process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the off symbol counter update process performed in the normal process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st symbol variation process performed in the normal process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed in the 1st symbol change process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the large opening opening / closing process performed in the normal process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process. 60 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 59. 60 is a flowchart showing solenoid control data output processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 59. It is the flowchart which showed NMI interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a payout discharge control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the payout discharge control process performed by MPU in a payout discharge control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the prize-ball control process performed by MPU in a payout discharge control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the lending control process performed by MPU in a payout discharge control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing door solenoid control data output processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 67. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a solenoid off counter setting process executed in the door solenoid control data output process of FIG. 68. It is a timing chart of ON and OFF of various solenoids in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the solenoid output off table of 2nd Embodiment stored in ROM of a main controller, (b) is solenoid control of 2nd Embodiment stored in RAM of a main controller. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data memorize | stored in a data memory for every bit. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process of 2nd Embodiment performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the solenoid control data output process of 2nd Embodiment performed by MPU in a main controller. 76 is a flowchart showing a solenoid off counter setting process executed in the solenoid control data output process of FIG. 75. It is the flowchart which showed the normal process of 2nd Embodiment performed by MPU in a main controller. 78 is a flowchart showing a tulip opening / closing process executed in the normal process of FIG. 77. It is a timing chart of ON and OFF of various solenoids in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a Special winning opening, large opening (movable member)
171 Right door (movable member)
172 Left door (movable member)
177 Right door solenoid (drive means)
184 Left door solenoid (drive means)
581 Large opening opening solenoid (drive means)
703b Large opening opening flag (position specifying means)
722a Door solenoid output off table (allocation information storage means)
723a Right door opening flag (position specifying means)
723b Left door opening flag (position designation means)
723d Solenoid off counter (counter, second counter)
723f Right door on / off counter (energization start timing storage means, energization time storage means)
723g Left door on / off counter (energization start timing storage means, energization time storage means)
505 Display control device (part of peripheral control device, display control means)
561 Main control device (main control means)
702a Solenoid output off table (allocation information storage means)
703d Solenoid off counter (counter, first counter)
703f Upper tulip release flag (position designation means)
703g Middle tulip release flag (position designation means)
703h Lower tulip opening flag (position designation means)
703i Upper tulip on / off counter (energization start timing storage means, energization time storage means)
703j Middle tulip on / off counter (energization start timing storage means, energization time storage means)
703k Lower tulip on / off counter (energization start timing storage means, energization time storage means)
921a Upper tulip (movable member)
922a Middle tulip (movable member)
923a Lower tulip (movable member)
931 Upper tulip solenoid (drive means)
932 Middle Tulip Solenoid (drive means)
933 Lower tulip solenoid (drive means)

Claims (5)

A plurality of movable members that can move between the first position and the second position, and the position of each of the movable members is either the first position or the second position, depending on the gaming state or the production state. A position designating unit for designating the position of the movable member, and when the position of the movable member is designated as the first position by the position designating unit, the movable member is positioned at the first position by applying current. Thus, when the position of the movable member is designated as the second position by the position designation means, it is provided for each movable member that positions the movable member at the second position by turning off the current. In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of driving means,
Designated position confirmation means for confirming the position of the movable member designated by the position designation means;
Detect whether the total amount of current consumed by the driving means exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from the state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies current Detecting means for
Energization of the drive means for controlling the total current consumption in the drive means corresponding to the movable member confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the position designation means designates the first position. When the detection means detects that the detection means exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from a state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply, With respect to the drive means specified by the position specifying means from the position before the detection by the detection means so that the total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. Driving information initial value setting means for setting energization cutoff instruction information for instructing not to energize current as an initial value of driving information;
The initial value of the drive information is set by the drive information initial value setting means, and the designation of the first position by the position designation means corresponds to the movable member confirmed by the designated position confirmation means. The total consumption current so that the total current consumption due to energization of the drive means to control the total current consumption in the drive means is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply that supplies the current. Drive information setting means for setting energization instruction information for instructing to energize each of the drive means to control the amount of current or the energization cut-off instruction information as drive information for each predetermined time;
When drive information is set for each of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled by the drive information setting means or the drive information initial value setting means, the drive information is output to the drive means. And an output means. The drive information setting means that is performed every predetermined time supplies a current to each of the drive means that controls the total current consumption amount in which the position of the movable member is designated as the first position by the position designation means. An intermittent current in which an energization period for energization and an energization interruption period for interrupting current supply are periodically repeated is expressed as [(the total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. The number of the driving means) / (the total number of the driving means whose total current consumption is to be controlled)] × 100% so that the drive information is allocated so as to be energized. Item 1. The gaming machine according to Item 1. An energization start timing storage unit that stores a timing at which energization of the drive unit corresponding to the movable member whose position is specified by the position specifying unit is the first position;
The drive information initial value setting means includes the drive information corresponding to the movable member whose position designated by the position designation means is confirmed to be the first position by the detection position confirmation means. The total current consumption amount due to energization of the driving means whose total current consumption amount is to be controlled is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source and exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source. The energization start timing storage means sets the energization cutoff instruction information as the drive information for the drive means in which the timing before detection by the detection means is stored. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine. Main control means for performing main control relating to the game;
Peripheral control means for performing peripheral control related to a game based on an instruction output by one-way communication from the main control means,
The main control means includes drive status information transmitting means for transmitting information related to the drive status of the drive means controlled by the main control means to the peripheral control means,
The drive information initial value setting means includes the drive information corresponding to the movable member whose position designated by the position designation means is confirmed to be the first position by the detection position confirmation means. The total current consumption due to energization of the drive means whose total current consumption is to be controlled is allowed by the capacity of the power supply from a state where the detection means is less than or less than the quantity allowed by the capacity of the power supply. The timing before detection by the detection means is stored in the energization start timing storage means among the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means when it is detected that the amount exceeds or exceeds the amount The energization time storage means that the energization is performed before the detection by the driving means controlled by the peripheral control means or the detection means. The gaming machine according to to said drive means stored, any of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that this is used to set the current blocking instruction information as the driving information by. A counter for counting a number equal to n times (n is an integer of 1 or more) of the total number of the drive means to control the total current consumption amount;
Counter updating means for updating the value of the counter every time corresponding to the time interval at which the output by the output means is performed;
For each value of the counter, [(total number of driving means for controlling the total current consumption) − (the driving where the total current consumption is less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power source] Allocation information storage means for storing allocation information in which the energization cutoff instruction information is allocated to the number of drive means corresponding to the number of means)],
The drive information initial value setting means calculates a total current consumption amount in the drive means corresponding to the movable member that has been confirmed by the designated position confirmation means that the designated position by the position designation means is the first position. The total current consumption amount due to energization of the drive means to be controlled exceeds or exceeds the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply from the state less than or less than the amount allowed by the capacity of the power supply by the detection means. Among the drive means controlled by the peripheral control means, the drive means in which the timing before detection by the detection means is stored in the energization start timing storage means, The drive means stored in the energization time storage means that the energization has been performed before the detection by the detection means is applied to the drive means. The counter initial value setting means for setting the value assigned to the energization cutoff instruction information in the assignment information stored by the information storage means as an initial value of the counter, or 4. The gaming machine according to 4.